JP2013212182A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine enhanced in a winning rate into a variable winning device.SOLUTION: A time t1 until variable display ends (3) and a variable winning device opens (4) after starting the variable display of normal identification information by passage of a game medium through a gate (1) is set to be shorter than a time T1 until the game medium having passed through the gate reaches the variable winning device, and a time t2 until the variable winning device closes (5) after the variable display ends and the variable winning device opens after starting the variable display of the normal identification information is set to be longer than the time T1, so that the game medium having passed through the gate wins into the variable winning device.

Description

  The present invention provides a disadvantage that a player plays a game by launching the game medium into the game area, is provided in the game area, and the game medium is difficult to win or cannot win, and the game medium is easy to win. Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the variable starting device provided in the game area and the variable starting device provided in the game area, a plurality of types of normal identification information that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed. The normal identification information variable display control means for performing control for deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display on the normal identification information variable display device, and the display result derived and displayed on the normal identification information variable display device becomes a predetermined display result. Based on the above, the variable winning device control means for controlling the variable winning device to change to the advantageous state, and the variable winning device is set to the advantageous state based on the predetermined condition being satisfied. A high frequency state control means for controlling the frequency varying from a low frequency state to the high frequency condition, it relates to a gaming machine having a.

  Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, in the so-called time-short state after the end of the big hit state, the variation time of the normal identification information (so-called normal symbol) and the special identification information (so-called special symbol) is set. It is known that the frequency of changing the variable prize-winning device to an advantageous state is controlled from a low-frequency state to a high-frequency state by shortening.

JP 2009-195507 A

  However, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, the time until the game medium reaches the variable prize device after the game medium passes through the normal starting area, and until the variable prize device changes to the advantageous state. Since the relationship with time is not taken into consideration, in the short time state, after the game medium that triggers the variable winning device to change to the advantageous state passes through the normal starting area, the gaming medium does not win the variable winning device ( Therefore, there is a problem that the winning rate to the variable winning device cannot be increased.

  The present invention has been made based on such a background, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing a winning rate to a variable winning device.

  The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the above problems. The reference numerals used in the description of the best mode for carrying out the invention and the drawings to be described later are added in parentheses for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to those added.

First, the invention according to means 1
The player plays a game by launching the game medium into the game area (7),
A variable that is provided in the game area (right game area 7B) and can be changed between an unfavorable state (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or difficult to win and an advantageous state (open state) in which the game medium is easy to win. A winning device (variable winning ball device 15);
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the normal start area (gate 32) provided in the game area, a plurality of types of normal identification information (normal symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed. The normal identification information variable display control means (the normal symbol display control process of step S33 and the display of step S22) for performing control for deriving and displaying the result of the display on the normal identification information variable display device (the normal symbol display 10 including the LEDs 401 and 402). A game control microcomputer 560 for executing control processing;
A variable for performing control to change the variable winning device to an advantageous state based on the display result derived and displayed on the normal identification information variable display device becoming a predetermined display result (the lighting state of the LED 402 indicating winning). A prize-winning device control means (game control microcomputer 560 for executing the ordinary electric accessory operation in step S514);
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established, the low base state (normal state: low base state) in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state is low, and the high base in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state is high. High base state control means for controlling the state (game control microcomputer 560 for performing high base state control start setting in step S169),
The variable winning device is downstream of the normal starting area in the gaming area, and a high percentage of game media that have passed through the normal starting area are controlled when the variable winning apparatus is controlled in an advantageous state. A gaming machine provided at a winning position (a gaming ball that has passed through the gate 32 wins the variable winning ball device 15 at a high rate),
The time t1 (the time t1 from (1) to (4) in FIG. 5) from when the variable display of the normal identification information is started in the high base state to when the variable winning device is controlled to the advantageous state is The game medium that has passed through the normal starting area is set to be shorter than the time Tx (time T1 from (1) to (2) in FIG. 5) until it reaches the variable winning device,
Time t2 (from (1) to (5) in FIG. 5) from the start of variable display of the normal identification information in the high base state to the end of control of the advantageous state after the variable winning device is controlled to the advantageous state. ) Until the time t2) is set to be longer than the time Tx.
The end point of t2 is a series of the case where the variable winning device is changed from the disadvantaged state to the advantageous state a plurality of times (when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a plurality of times in the high base state). This is the point in time when the control of the advantageous state ends. That is, the end point of the last advantageous state.
According to this, when the game medium that has passed through the normal starting area reaches the variable winning device, the variable winning device is controlled to be in an advantageous state, so that the winning rate of the game medium to the variable winning device can be increased. it can.

The invention according to means 2
A gaming machine described in means 1,
The time t1 is set to be equal to or shorter than the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game medium (variable display time 0.2 seconds + symbol fixed stop time 0. 5 seconds = 0.7 seconds).
According to this, since the game medium launched immediately after the variable winning device is controlled to be in a disadvantageous state can be won in the variable winning device, the winning rate of the game medium to the variable winning device can be further increased. it can.

The invention according to means 3 is
A gaming machine described in means 1 or 2,
When the game medium that has passed through the normal starting area (gate 32) flows down toward the variable prize device when the variable prize device is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the game medium deviates from the path. The gaming machine is characterized in that a detour (a distance between the game nail 40a and the variable winning ball device 15) or a general winning area (winning slot 29d) in which the game medium can be won is provided.
According to this, since the game medium that has passed through the normal starting area can be guided to the detour or the general winning area, the winning rate of the game medium to the variable winning device can be adjusted according to the business form of the game hall. Can do.

The invention according to means 4 is
The player plays a game by launching the game medium into the game area (7),
A variable that is provided in the game area (left game area 7A) and can be changed between an unfavorable state (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or difficult to win, and an advantageous state (open state) in which the game medium is easy to win. A winning device (variable winning ball device 15 ');
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the normal start area (gate 32 ') provided in the game area, a plurality of types of normal identification information (ordinary symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed. Ordinary identification information variable display control means (normal symbol display control processing in step S33 and step S22) for performing control for deriving and displaying the display result on the normal identification information variable display device (ordinary symbol display 10 including LED 401 and LED 402). A game control microcomputer 560 for executing display control processing;
A variable for performing control to change the variable winning device to an advantageous state based on the display result derived and displayed on the normal identification information variable display device becoming a predetermined display result (the lighting state of the LED 402 indicating winning). A prize-winning device control means (game control microcomputer 560 for executing the ordinary electric accessory operation in step S514);
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established, the low base state (normal state: low base state) in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state is low, and the high base in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state is high. High base state control means for controlling the state (game control microcomputer 560 for performing high base state control start setting in step S169),
In the variable prize device, the game medium (left-handed game ball) that is upstream of the normal start area in the game area (left game area 7A) and is launched with a predetermined strength is the variable prize. Provided in a position to win a high percentage when the device is controlled to an advantageous state,
The normal start area is a gaming machine provided at a position (a lower left portion of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 ′) through which a game medium that has not won the variable winning apparatus passes at a predetermined frequency,
A time t1 (time t1 from (1) to (4) in FIG. 81) from when variable display of the normal identification information is started in the high base state to when the variable winning device is controlled to be in an advantageous state is The time Ty from when the first game medium passes through the normal starting area until the second game medium launched next to the first game medium reaches the variable winning device (FIG. 81 ( It is set to be shorter than the time T2) from 1) to (6),
Time t2 (from (1) to (5) in FIG. 81) from when variable display of the normal identification information is started in the high base state to when the variable winning device is controlled to the advantageous state and the control of the advantageous state ends. ) Until the time t2) is set to be longer than the time Ty.
The end point of t2 is a series of the case where the variable winning device is changed from the disadvantaged state to the advantageous state a plurality of times (when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a plurality of times in the high base state). This is the point in time when the control of the advantageous state ends. That is, the end point of the last advantageous state.
According to this, when the game medium launched next to the game medium that has passed through the normal starting area reaches the variable winning device, the variable winning device is controlled to be in an advantageous state. You can increase your winning rate.

The invention according to means 5 is
A gaming machine described in means 4,
The time until the first game medium reaches the normal starting area (gate 32 ′) from the variable winning device without winning the variable winning device (variable winning ball device 15 ′) and the time t1. The sum is a gaming machine that is set to be equal to or shorter than the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game medium.
According to this, since the game medium launched immediately after the variable winning device is controlled to be in a disadvantageous state can be won in the variable winning device, the winning rate of the game medium to the variable winning device can be further increased. it can.

Further, the invention according to means 6
A gaming machine described in any one of means 1 to 5,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the variable winning device (variable winning ball device 15), a plurality of types of special identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed. The special identification information variable display control means for performing control for deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display on the special identification information variable display device (first special symbol display 8a, second special symbol display 8b) (special of step S32) A game control microcomputer 560) for executing the symbol display control process and the display control process of step S22;
The time t3 from the start of the first variable display of the special identification information in the high base state to the start of the second variable display of the special identification information next to the first variable display is the game It is set to be the same as or shorter than the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the medium (in the case of ultrashort variation, the variable display time is 0.2 seconds + the symbol fixed stop time is 0.5) Second = 0.7 seconds).
According to this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of invalid winnings in which variable display of special identification information is not performed although winning is made in the variable winning device.

  In addition, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means 7-10 shown below.

First, the invention according to means 7 is:
The player plays a game by launching the game medium into the game area (7),
A variable winning device (variable winning ball) which is provided in the gaming area and can be changed between an unfavorable state (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or difficult to win, and an advantageous state (open state) in which the gaming medium is easy to win. Device 15);
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the normal start area (gate 32) provided in the game area, the normal display means (the normal symbol display 10 comprising the LEDs 401 and 402) is variably displayed, and the normal display is performed. Normal variable display control means for performing control for deriving and displaying the variable display result of the means (game control microcomputer 560 for executing the normal symbol display control process in step S33 and the display control process in step S22);
Variable winning device control means (step for performing control for changing the variable winning device to an advantageous state based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal display means becomes a predetermined display result (lighted state of the LED 402 indicating the winning). A game control microcomputer 560 for executing the ordinary electric accessory operation of S514;
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established, the low base state (normal state: low base state) in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state is low, and the high base in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state is high. High base state control means for controlling the state (game control microcomputer 560 for executing the high base state control start setting of step S169),
The variable winning device is a gaming machine provided at a position where a gaming medium launched (right-handed) with a predetermined launch intensity wins at a high rate when the variable winning device is controlled in an advantageous state. There,
In the high base state, the time (0.2 seconds (0.7 seconds including the symbol fixed stop time)) from when the normal display means starts variable display until the variable display result is derived and displayed is It is set to be equal to or shorter than the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game medium,
The normal variable display control means includes
When the variable display of the normal display means is performed, the identification information is updated and displayed on the first display section of the normal display means (LED 401 blinks), while the identification information is identified on a second display section different from the first display section. The information is updated and displayed in a certain display state (LED 402 is turned off),
When the variable display result of the normal display means is derived and displayed, the update display of the identification information is stopped in the first display unit to make a constant display state (LED 401 is turned off), while the second display The game machine is characterized in that the identification information that is the variable display result of the normal display means is displayed in the section (if it is a hit, the LED 402 is turned on, and if it is off, the LED 402 is turned off).
In order to set the second display section here to a certain display state, the identification information as the previous variable display result is continuously displayed, and the identification information as the previous variable display result is not displayed. Both states are included. In order to set the first display unit to a certain display state, the identification information when the update display is stopped is continuously displayed, and the identification information when the update display is stopped is displayed. Both states are not included.
According to this, even if the variable display in the normal display means is shortened, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display and the derivation display of the variable display result are switched.

The invention according to means 8
The player plays a game by launching the game medium into the game area (7),
It is provided in the game area and can be changed between an unfavorable state (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or difficult to win, and an advantageous state (open state) in which the game medium is easy to win. 2 start winning opening 13b) variable winning device (variable winning ball device 15),
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the special starting area, special display means (first special symbol display device 8a, second special symbol display device 8b) is variably displayed, and the variable display result of the special display means Special variable display control means (game control microcomputer 560) for performing control for deriving and displaying
Based on the fact that the variable display result of the special display means becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the specific game state control means (game control micro) for controlling to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player Computer 560);
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning to the probability variation attacker 20B), the variable winning device is advantageous from the low base state (normal state: low base state) in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state. High base state control means for controlling to a high base state with a high proportion of states (game control microcomputer 560 for executing the high base state control start setting in step S169),
The variable winning device is a gaming machine provided at a position where a gaming medium launched (right-handed) with a predetermined launch intensity wins at a high rate when the variable winning device is controlled in an advantageous state. There,
Time until the variable display result is derived and displayed after the special display means starts variable display in the high base state (0.2 seconds of ultra-short fluctuation (0.7 seconds including symbol fixed stop time) ) Is set to be equal to or shorter than the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game medium,
The special variable display control means includes
When the variable display of the special display means is performed, the identification information is updated and displayed on the first display section of the special display means (LED 405 is blinked), while the identification information is identified on a second display section different from the first display section. The information is updated and displayed in a certain display state (LED 406 turns off all segments)
When the variable display result of the special display means is derived and displayed, the update display of the identification information is stopped in the first display unit to make a constant display state (LED 405 is turned off), while the second display unit The gaming machine is characterized in that identification information which is a variable display result of the special display means is displayed (a predetermined segment of the LED 406 is turned on according to the display result).
In order to set the second display section here to a certain display state, the identification information as the previous variable display result is continuously displayed, and the identification information as the previous variable display result is not displayed. Both states are included. In order to set the first display unit to a certain display state, the identification information when the update display is stopped is continuously displayed, and the identification information when the update display is stopped is displayed. Both states are not included.
According to this, even if the variable display in the special display means is shortened, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display and the derivation display of the variable display result are switched.

The invention according to means 9 is
The player plays a game by launching the game medium into the game area (7),
It is provided in the game area and can be changed between an unfavorable state (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or difficult to win, and an advantageous state (open state) in which the game medium is easy to win. 2 start winning opening 13b) variable winning device (variable winning ball device 15),
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the special starting area, special display means (first special symbol display device 8a, second special symbol display device 8b) is variably displayed, and the variable display result of the special display means Special variable display control means (game control microcomputer 560) for performing control for deriving and displaying
Effect display means (effect display device 9) for displaying effects corresponding to the variable display of the special display means;
Specific display means (fourth symbol display areas 9a, 9b, 9c, 9d) provided in the effect display means for performing variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the special display means;
Game control means (game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect display control means (effect control microcomputer 100) for performing display control of the effect display means including the specific display means based on a control command (variation pattern command, symbol confirmation designation command) from the game control means; ,
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established (winning to the probability variation attacker 20B), the variable winning device is advantageous from the low base state (normal state: low base state) in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state. High base state control means for controlling to a high base state with a high proportion of states (game control microcomputer 560 for executing the high base state control start setting in step S169),
The variable winning device is a gaming machine provided at a position where a gaming medium launched (right-handed) with a predetermined launch intensity wins at a high rate when the variable winning device is controlled in an advantageous state. There,
Time until the variable display result is derived and displayed after the specific display means starts variable display in the high-frequency state (0.2 seconds of ultra-short fluctuation (0.7 seconds including symbol fixed stop time)) ) Is set to be equal to or shorter than the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game medium,
The effect display control means is based on a control command from the game control means,
During execution of the variable display,
When performing variable display of the specific display means, the identification information is updated and displayed in the first display section (fourth symbol display area 9c) of the specific display means (display and non-display (a state in which a background image is displayed) ) Alternately and repeatedly flashing), while the identification information is not updated and displayed in the second display part (fourth symbol display area 9d) different from the first display part (non-display (background The image is displayed)),
When the variable display result of the specific display means is derived and displayed, the update display of the identification information is stopped in the first display unit to make a constant display state (stop display state), while the second display unit In the game machine, the identification information which is the variable display result of the specific display means is displayed (red if it is a big hit, and blue if it is off).
In order to set the second display section here to a certain display state, the identification information as the previous variable display result is continuously displayed, and the identification information as the previous variable display result is not displayed. Both states are included. In order to set the first display unit to a certain display state, the identification information when the update display is stopped is continuously displayed, and the identification information when the update display is stopped is displayed. Both states are not included.
According to this, since not only the variable display on the special display means but also the position of the index information on the cumulative display means, it can be grasped whether or not the specific gaming state is entered, which is convenient for the player.

Furthermore, the invention according to means 10
A gaming machine described in any one of means 7 to 9,
The variable winning device constitutes a special starting area (second starting winning port 13b),
The start condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through the special start area (the game ball wins the second start winning opening 13b), and then the predetermined start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories is not 0) The special display means (the second special symbol display device 8b) is based on the state where the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed and the big hit game is not executed. ) Is displayed, the variable display result of the special display means is derived and displayed, and the specific game advantageous to the player is based on the fact that the display result thus derived and displayed is the specific display result (big hit symbol). Control to state (big hit gaming state)
A hold storage means (second hold storage buffer) for storing information relating to variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied as hold storage information until the start condition is satisfied;
Prior determination means for determining whether or not the variable display based on the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means is the specific display result when the start condition is satisfied (in step S61, random R A game control microcomputer 560 for executing a process of comparing the value and the jackpot determination value;
Information display means (production control microcomputer 100) for displaying index information (bullet hole) indicating an index as to whether or not the specific display result is obtained according to the variable display;
Display position determining means for determining the display position of the index information in the information display means (production control microcomputer 100 for determining the position of the bullet hole displayed on the target 1500),
The information display means accumulates the index information in the high-frequency state by displaying the index information displayed according to the previous variable display until at least the index information according to the next variable display is displayed. Including cumulative display means for displaying (a microcomputer 100 for effect control for continuously displaying bullet holes once displayed over a plurality of variable displays);
The display position determining means is when the hold storage information that is the specific display result is stored in the hold storage means (when a variable category command specified in jackpot is stored in the start winning command storage area) For the variable display, the position of the index information to be displayed next is determined in accordance with the display position of the index information to be displayed first (the bullet 1500 displayed after the bullet displayed earlier is the target 1500. The game machine is characterized in that it includes position determination means (production control microcomputer 100) at the time of hold memory determination.
According to this, since not only the variable display on the special display means but also the position of the index information on the cumulative display means, it can be grasped whether or not the specific gaming state is entered, which is convenient for the player.

  In addition, the form concerning the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means 11-14 shown below.

First, the invention according to means 11 is:
A player plays a game by firing a game medium (game ball) into the game area (7),
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area (first start prize opening 13a, second start prize opening 13b) provided in the game area, a plurality of types of identification information (first special identification information) can be identified. (Design, 2nd special symbol) is variably displayed, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed.
Based on the display result of the derived display being a specific game result (big hit symbol), control to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state to a normal state or a high probability state that is more easily controlled to the specific gaming state than the normal state,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area, prior determination means for determining whether the display result is derived and displayed before the display result is derived and displayed (the value of the random R in step S61) A game control microcomputer 560 for executing a process of comparing the jackpot determination value;
High probability state end determination means for determining whether to end the high probability state before the display result is derived and displayed when controlled to the high probability state (probability falling drop lottery process in step S60A) A game control microcomputer 560 for executing
A variable starting device (variable winning ball) that constitutes the starting area and can be changed between a disadvantageous state (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to pass through and an advantageous state (open state) in which the game medium is easy to pass through Device 15);
Based on the derivation display of the specific display result, the frequency at which the variable starting device changes to the advantageous state after the end of the specific gaming state is set to a low-frequency state (normally, the opening time and the number of opening are not increased). State) to a high frequency state (high base state in which the opening time and the number of times of opening are increased) (for game control in which high probability / high base state control start setting is executed in step S169 in FIG. 35) A microcomputer 560);
In the high-probability state and the high-frequency state, when it is determined by the pre-decision means to be a specific game result, and when it is determined by the high-probability state end determination means to end the high-probability state, the same High-frequency state ending means for ending the high-frequency state at a timing (a gaming control microcomputer 560 that executes high probability / high base state end setting in step S107E in FIG. 31);
The first signal that can specify that it is controlled to the high frequency state (two jackpot signals, and as shown in FIG. 39, two jackpot signals are output and one jackpot signal is not output. First signal output means (information output circuit 64) for outputting the period (2) to (3) and the period (5) to (6) in a high base state) to an external device;
A second signal output means (information output circuit 64) for outputting a second signal (one signal per jackpot) that can be specified to be controlled to the specific gaming state to an external device;
The first signal output means is in a variable display period ((3) to (4 shown in FIG. 39) determined to end the high-frequency state even when the high-frequency state end means ends the high-frequency state. ) And the period (6) to (7)), the gaming machine is characterized by continuously outputting the first signal.
First, according to the invention according to the means 11, even if the high frequency state is ended, it is possible to specify that the high frequency state is controlled during the variable display period determined to end the high frequency state. Since the signal is continuously output, it is possible to correctly recognize the specific gaming state continuously generated during the high-frequency state in the external device without changing the external device, and also to check the gaming state even if the external device display is viewed. The player cannot recognize that the change has occurred, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

The invention according to means 12 is
A gaming machine described in means 11,
The game area is provided with a first area (left game area 7A) and a second area (right game area 7B) in which a player can shoot the game media by being divided,
The variable starter is provided at a location where a game medium launched toward the second region easily passes,
A normal starting device (a winning device having a first starting winning port 13a) that makes it easy for a game medium launched toward the first region to pass through and constitutes the starting region;
A variable special device (special variable winning ball device 20) capable of changing into a special advantageous state in which the game medium launched toward the second region is easy to pass during the specific gaming state;
Informing means (not shown in FIG. 77 (a)) for notifying the player in such a high frequency state that the game medium is fired toward the second region is notified to the player during the high frequency state. An effect control microcomputer 100) that performs control to display “aiming right” on the effect display device 9 in a high base state,
The notification means changes the firing area notification during the high-frequency state to a state in which the player cannot visually recognize or is difficult to visually recognize during the variable display period that the high-frequency state end means determines to end the high-frequency state. This is a gaming machine characterized in that the display of “Aim at the right” is eliminated as shown in FIG. 77 (b).
Further, according to the invention according to the means 12, after the end of the variable display determined to end the high-frequency state, if a specific gaming state occurs, it fires again toward the second area, and the high-probability state ends. Then, since it returns from the second area and fires toward the first area, during the variable display period, the shooting area notification is changed to a mode in which the player cannot visually recognize or is difficult to visually recognize during the high-frequency state. Thus, confusion of the player can be reduced.

The invention according to means 13 is
A gaming machine described in means 11 or 12,
In the high-probability state and the high-frequency state, a variable display when it is determined to be a specific game result by the pre-decision unit, and a high-probability state end determination unit when the high-probability state is determined to end Common effect execution means for executing notification that can specify which is determined after executing a common effect (super-reach C with a battle-like effect) that cannot be specified in variable display. (A microcomputer 100 for effect control that executes a defeat effect in the case of a probable fall and executes a victory effect in the case of a big hit).
Further, according to the invention according to the means 13, since a common effect is executed by the variable display when determined as the specific display result and the variable display when determined to end the high probability state, the variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged until the display result is derived and displayed.

Furthermore, the invention according to means 14 is
A gaming machine described in any one of means 11-13,
High-probability state variable display count storage means for storing a high-probability state variable display count (high-probability state background continuation counter value) that is the number of times that the variable display has been performed when controlled to the high-probability state ( A RAM of the production control microcomputer 100 for storing the high probability state background continuation counter);
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when controlled to the high probability state (the effect control microcomputer 100 for determining the display content of the background screen according to the value of the high probability state background continuation counter value); Further comprising
The high-probability state variable display count storage means cumulatively stores the high-probability state variable display count (does not reset the high-probability state background continuation counter even if controlled to the big hit gaming state),
The specific effect execution means changes the effect content of the specific effect based on the fact that the variable display count during the high probability state stored in the variable display count storage means during the high probability state reaches a predetermined number ( A gaming machine characterized in that the size and number of UFOs displayed on the background screen in the high probability state and the background color are changed according to the high probability state background continuation counter value.
Further, according to the invention according to the means 14, the high probability state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display count in the high probability state that is stored cumulatively without being cleared even if controlled in the specific gaming state has reached a predetermined number. Since the content of the specific effect to be executed when it is being performed is changed, the player can be kept bored even if the high probability state continues for a long period of time.

  In addition, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the means 15-20 shown below.

First, the invention according to means 15 is:
A player plays a game by firing a game medium (game ball) into the game area (7),
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area (first start prize opening 13a, second start prize opening 13b) provided in the game area, a plurality of types of identification information (first special identification information) can be identified. (Design, second special design, decorative design) are variably displayed, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed,
Based on the display result of the derivation display being a specific display result (big hit symbol), control to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state to a normal state or a high probability state that is more easily controlled to the specific gaming state than the normal state,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area, prior determination means for determining whether the display result is derived and displayed before the display result is derived and displayed (the value of the random R in step S61) A game control microcomputer 560 for executing a process of comparing the jackpot determination value;
High probability state end determination means for determining whether to end the high probability state before the display result is derived and displayed when controlled to the high probability state (probability falling drop lottery process in step S60A) A game control microcomputer 560 for executing
High-probability state variable display count storage means for storing a high-probability state variable display count (high-probability state background continuation counter value) that is the number of times that the variable display has been performed when controlled to the high-probability state ( A RAM of the production control microcomputer 100 for storing the high probability state background continuation counter);
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when controlled to the high probability state (the effect control microcomputer 100 for determining the display content of the background screen according to the value of the high probability state background continuation counter value); With
The high-probability state variable display count storage means cumulatively stores without clearing the storage of the variable display count during the high-probability state even if controlled to the specific gaming state (even if controlled to the big hit gaming state) High probability state background continuation counter is not reset)
The specific effect execution means changes the effect content of the specific effect based on the fact that the variable display count during the high probability state stored in the variable display count storage means during the high probability state reaches a predetermined number ( The gaming machine is characterized in that the size and number of UFOs displayed on the background screen in the high probability state and the background color are changed according to the high probability state background continuation counter value.
First, according to the invention according to means 15, control is made to a high probability state based on the fact that the variable display count in the high probability state that is cumulatively stored without being cleared even if controlled to a specific gaming state has reached a predetermined number. Since the content of the specific effect to be executed when it is being performed is changed, the player can be kept bored even if the high probability state continues for a long period of time.

The invention according to means 16 is
A gaming machine described in means 15,
The specific performance is composed of a plurality of elements (number and size of UFO and background color),
The specific effect executing means, based on the fact that the variable display count during the high probability state stored in the variable display count storage means during the high probability state has reached a first predetermined number of times, The specific effect is executed by changing the first element (the effect of increasing the number of small UFOs every time the high probability state background continuation counter value increases by 100), and the variable display count during the high probability state is the first. 2, the second element of the plurality of elements is changed to execute the specific effect (the background color is changed every time the high probability state background continuation counter value increases by 300). The game machine is characterized in that the effect of changing is executed).
Further, according to the invention according to the means 16, since there are a plurality of patterns of specific effects based on the fact that the number of variable displays during the high probability state has reached a predetermined number, the player can be further bored.

The invention according to means 17 is
A gaming machine described in means 15 or 16,
The specific performance is composed of a plurality of elements (number and size of UFO and background color),
The specific effect executing means is capable of performing variable display times during the high probability state even during the specific game state (during a round) controlled when the display result when the high probability state is controlled is a specific game result. The specific effect is executed by changing the third element of the plurality of elements according to the variable display count in the high probability state stored in the storage means and the number of times controlled to the specific gaming state ( As in the high probability state, the background screen corresponding to the high probability state background continuation counter value is displayed, and the rank corresponding to the continuous probability counter value and the high probability state background continuation counter value is displayed as a third element). It is a featured gaming machine.
Further, according to the invention according to the means 17, since the specific effect is changed according to the variable display count during the high probability state and the number of times controlled to the specific game state, the number of the same specific game state is different. It is easy to make the contents of the production, and it can keep the player from getting bored.

The invention according to means 18 is
A gaming machine described in any one of means 15 to 17,
The predetermined number of times can be set so as to change according to the number of times the specific effect is changed (the background screen changes in a longer period as the high probability state background continuation counter value increases). It is a gaming machine to play.
Further, according to the invention relating to the means 18, since the predetermined number of times of changing the specific effect changes according to the number of times of changing the specific effect, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness.

The invention according to means 19 is
A gaming machine described in any one of means 15-18,
Game history storage means (RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100 that stores a high probability state background continuation counter and a continuous channel counter) capable of storing a game history in the high probability state even after the high probability state ends;
On the condition that the high probability state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the high probability state ends, the previous high probability state has ended based on the game history stored in the game history storage means. Specific effect resuming means for restarting the specific effect at the time (the probability range background continuation counter and the continuous channel counter are not reset within a predetermined number of fluctuations from the probability change fall (determined as N in step S666B and processing in steps S666C and S666D) When the high probability state is reached again within a predetermined number of fluctuations), the effect control microcomputer 100) continues to use the high probability state background continuation counter value and the continuous channel counter value that have not been reset. Prepared,
The predetermined period can be set according to the game history stored in the game history storage means (for example, when the value of the continuous channel counter is 2 or less, within 100 fluctuations, the value of the continuous channel counter is 3). If it is above, it is set within 30 fluctuations).
Further, according to the invention according to the means 19, when the high probability state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the high probability state ends, the specific effect when the previous high probability state ends is resumed. Even if the probability state ends, the willingness to continue the game can be increased.

Further, the invention according to means 20
A gaming machine described in any one of means 15-18,
A variable starting device (variable winning ball) that constitutes the starting area and can be changed between a disadvantageous state (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to pass through and an advantageous state (open state) in which the game medium is easy to pass through Device 15);
Based on the derivation display of the specific display result, the frequency at which the variable starting device changes to the advantageous state after the end of the specific gaming state is set to a low-frequency state (normally, the opening time and the number of opening are not increased). State) to a high frequency state (high base state in which the opening time and the number of times of opening are increased) (for game control in which high probability / high base state control start setting is executed in step S169 in FIG. 35) A microcomputer 560);
In the high-probability state and the high-frequency state, a variable display when it is determined to be a specific game result by the pre-decision unit, and a high-probability state end determination unit when the high-probability state is determined to end Common effect execution means for executing notification that can specify which is determined after executing a common effect (super reach C accompanied by a battle-like effect) that cannot be specified with variable display. If it is a big hit, it will be a victory effect, and if it is a probable fall, it will produce a defeat effect.
In the high-probability state and the high-frequency state, when it is determined by the pre-decision means to be a specific game result, and when it is determined by the high-probability state end determination means to end the high-probability state, the same A high-frequency state ending means for ending the high-frequency state at a timing (game control microcomputer 560 that executes high probability / high base state end setting in step S107E of FIG. 31), further comprising: Machine.
Further, according to the invention according to the means 20, in the high probability state and the high frequency state, when it is determined that the specific game result is determined and when it is determined that the high probability state is ended, the high frequency state is set at the same timing. Since it is terminated, it can be prevented from knowing whether it has been determined that the specific game result is determined as the specific game result or the high probability state is ended depending on the frequency at which the variable starting device is changed to the advantageous state.

  Furthermore, the best mode for carrying out the invention to be described later includes the inventions according to means 21 to 25 shown below.

The invention according to means 21 is
(1) Changes between a disadvantageous state (closed state) in which a game ball is difficult or difficult to win in the start area (second start winning opening 13b) and an advantageous state (open state) in which the game ball is likely to win in the start area A variable start winning device (variable winning ball device 15) that is possible;
Plural types that can be identified when a start condition is satisfied after a game ball is won in the start area (when the game is not a big hit game state, a special symbol is not variably displayed, and there is a holding memory) Variation display means (first special symbol display 8a, second special symbol display 8b, effect display device) for performing variation display of the identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, decoration symbol) and deriving the display result 9)
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived in the variation display means, , A pre-determining means for determining whether or not to control the specific gaming state before the display result of the identification information is derived (a game for executing a process of comparing the random R value with the jackpot determination value in step S61) A control microcomputer 560);
Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (winning of the game ball to the probability variation attacker 20B), the probability of the specific display result is set to a high probability state (high probability state) higher than the normal state, and the variable start winning is achieved. Special game control means for controlling a special game state (high probability / high base state) in which the frequency of the game ball entering the device is higher than a predetermined low approach state (high speed state / high base state). (Game control microcomputer 560 for executing the high probability / high base state control start setting in step S169);
Special game end determination means for determining whether or not to end the control of the special game state before the display result of the identification information is derived when the special game state is controlled (probability change of step S60A). A game control microcomputer 560) for executing the falling lottery process;
The special gaming state is terminated based on the fact that the special gaming state determining means has decided to end the control of the special gaming state, or the pre-determining means has decided to control the specific gaming state. Special game end means (game control microcomputer 560 that executes the high probability / high base state end setting of step S107E when the probability change fall flag or the big hit flag is set);
In the special gaming state, the change display when it is decided to control to the specific game state by the pre-determining means (variation display at the time of jackpot determination), and the special game end control means ends the control of the special gaming state Then, after executing the common display (super reach C with the effect of the battle mode) that cannot be specified in the change display (change display at the time of the probability change fall determination) when it is determined, A common performance execution means (notification control microcomputer 100 which executes a victory effect if it is a big hit, and a defeat effect if it is a probable fall), which can notify whether the decision has been made,
The special game end means is determined by the special game end determination means to end the control of the special game state (when it is determined YES in step S207), and the specific game state is determined by the prior determination means. The high approach state is terminated at the same timing (when high probability / high base state end setting is executed in step S107E in FIG. 31). It is a gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to such a configuration, the special gaming state is terminated based on the decision to end the control of the special gaming state or the decision to control to the specific gaming state. Before the display result of the identification information is derived, it is determined whether or not to end the control of the special gaming state, so whether or not to end the control of the special gaming state fairly for all the variable displays. Can be determined. In addition, a common effect in which it is not possible to specify which of the change display when it is decided to control to the specific gaming state and the change display when it is decided to end the control of the special gaming state is executed. After that, notification that can specify which decision has been made is performed. Further, the high entry state is terminated at the same timing when it is determined to end the control of the special gaming state and when it is determined to control the special gaming state. Thus, when the special gaming state ends, the variable start prize device is displayed with a variable display when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state and a variable display when it is determined to end the control of the special gaming state. Since the difference in the frequency at which the game balls enter is not generated and the effect in the variable display is made common, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the specific display result is obtained.

The invention according to means 22
In the gaming machine of means 21, the common effect executing means, when the special game end determining means is determined to end the control of the special gaming state, the common effect executing means as the common effect as the specific game. After performing an effect that suggests whether or not the state is controlled (display of the battle effect screen of FIG. 77 (b)), it is notified that the control of the special gaming state has ended (FIG. 77 (c)). It displays the defeat screen).

  According to such a configuration, when a decision to end the control of the special gaming state is made, after performing the effect suggesting whether or not to be controlled to the specific gaming state as a common effect, control of the special gaming state Since it is notified that the game has ended, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the specific gaming state in the common performance, and to know whether or not the specific display result is obtained before the common performance ends. Can be prevented.

The invention according to means 23 is
In the gaming machine of the means 21 or the means 22, the specific determination is performed by the predetermining means for the variable display in which the execution condition of the variable display due to the winning of the game ball in the start area is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. First storage information for specifying whether or not to determine to control the gaming state (random R hold storage data for determining the special symbol display result), and the special gaming state by the special gaming end determination means The second storage information (random 0 hold storage data for probability change fall determination) for specifying whether or not the decision to end the control is made is held within a predetermined upper limit number (hold storage information). Data storage) storage means (first reservation storage buffer, second reservation storage buffer),
In the state of being controlled to the special gaming state, the first storage information (random R that matches the probability change middle jackpot determination value) that specifies control in the specific gaming state in the holding storage means, or When the second storage information (random 0 that coincides with the determination value of the probability change fall) that specifies the decision to end the control of the special gaming state is stored as the pending storage information (step of FIG. 24) In S1216 and S1227), before the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage information is executed, the preceding common effect that is executed in advance with the common effect (the same special effect sound) that cannot be specified as to which state is to be obtained. Execution means (a big hit in high probability / high base state, or a special command with a predetermined probability when receiving a variation category command indicating deviation in high probability / high base state and a probability fall And further comprising a performance control microcomputer 100) and to output the sound output.

  According to such a configuration, before the change display corresponding to the on-hold storage information is executed, any of the control to the specific game state and the decision to end the control of the special game state has been made. Since a common performance that cannot be specified as to whether the state is to be executed is executed in advance, the player's expectation for being controlled to the specific gaming state, and the decision to end the control of the special gaming state is made Since both the player's anxiety can be expressed, the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention according to means 24 is
In any one of the gaming machines 21 to 23, a variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern in which a variation time for performing the variation display is determined from a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the determination by the prior determination unit It further comprises selection means (a game control microcomputer 560 for executing the variation pattern setting process of FIG. 31),
When the display result of the variable display becomes a display result other than the specific display result in the state controlled to the special gaming state, the variation pattern selection means is configured to have a predetermined specific variation pattern (high probability / The deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C in the case of high base and no probability change falls is selected (step S101 in FIG. 31).

  According to such a configuration, when the display result of the variable display becomes a display result other than the specific display result in the state controlled to the special gaming state, the predetermined specific variation pattern is selected. Since it is possible to prevent an unnecessary performance from being executed, the interest of the game can be improved.

The invention according to means 25 is
In any of the gaming machines 21 to 24, it is determined that the special game end determination means ends the control of the special game state, and the prior determination means determines to control the specific game state. Based on the above, it is further provided with a privilege granting means (production control microcomputer 100) for granting a predetermined privilege (display of the special character 1300 or the like) to the player.

  According to such a configuration, since it is determined to end the control of the special gaming state, and based on the determination to control to the specific gaming state, a predetermined privilege is given to the player, as described above. By adding value to rarely occurring situations, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the special symbol indicator at the time of the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol, and a change stop. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the 4th symbol display area at the time of the fluctuation | variation of the 4th symbol, and the time of a fluctuation | variation stop. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the normal symbol indicator at the time of the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol, and the time of a fluctuation | variation stop. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation period of a normal symbol, and the state of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of adjustment of the game nail around a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance specific area | region and a holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a probability change fall determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a probability change fall lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol display control process. It is a time chart which shows the example of the signal output from a gaming machine according to a gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the background image according to the high probability state background continuation counter value. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a holding ball mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prefetch notice allocation table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the rank according to a continuous channel counter value and a high probability state background continuation counter value. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a prefetch notice setting restriction | limiting period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a prefetch notice setting restriction | limiting period. It is a distribution table of the shape of the hold memory in the look-ahead notice of the change of the hold ball. It is a distribution table of the lighting flashing mode of the hold memory in the prefetch notice of the hold ball change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the background image according to a game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the common effect performed during variable display in a high probability state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the rank displayed according to a continuous change counter value and a high probability state background continuation counter value during a big hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a background image when a game state changes from a high probability state to a normal state, and becomes a high probability state again within a predetermined number of fluctuations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the gate and variable winning ball apparatus in a modification. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the fluctuation period of the normal symbol in a modification, and the state of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning in a modification. It is explanatory drawing of the subject solved by this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the subject solved by this Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The game area 7 includes a left game area 7A (first game area) on the left side and a right game area 7B (second game area) on the right side when viewed from the top of the effect display device 9 provided in the center. The left game area 7 </ b> A that is the first game area and the right game area 7 </ b> B that is the second game area may be divided, for example, by the end face of the effect display device 9 or the arrangement of the game nails in the game area 7. When the game ball launched from the ball striking device and driven into the game area 7 is guided to the left game area 7A, the game ball is guided to the right game area 7B, for example, by being guided along the array of game nails. When it is impossible to guide or difficult to guide, and when it is guided to the right game area 7B, it is impossible to guide to the left game area 7A or difficult to guide by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

  In the left game area 7 </ b> A, a first start winning opening 13 a is provided below the effect display device 9. In the right game area 7B, a variable winning ball device 15 having a gate 32 and a second start winning port 13b is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9, and a normal attacker 20A and a probability change attacker 20B are provided below the effect display device 9. A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided.

  Here, the first start winning opening 13a is provided immediately below the effect display device 9. However, when the left-handed game ball is shot to aim at the left game area 7A, the game ball is easy to win, When the player hits the game area 7B and hits the game ball to the right, the game balls are difficult to win due to the arrangement of the game nails and the guide members 39a to 39c provided on the flow path of the game balls. It belongs to the left game area 7A. The variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning port 13b is provided below the first starting winning port 13a. When the player makes a right strike, the game ball passes through the gate 32. Then, it can be expected that the variable winning ball device 15 is in an open state and the game ball wins the second start winning opening 13b. Therefore, the variable winning ball device 15 having the second start winning opening 13b belongs to the right game area 7B. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the tilt control of the movable blade piece.

  Further, during the big hit gaming state, the normal attacker 20A or the probability variation attacker 20B is released, but the probability variation attacker 20B is on the path where the game ball can easily enter when hitting the right (the lower right of the effect display device 9, Since it is arranged on the route formed by the guide members 39b and 39c, it belongs to the right game area 7B. In addition, the normal attacker 20A is arranged directly below the variable winning ball apparatus 15, but when the player hits the right, the gaming ball guided by the guiding member 39b or the game nail 40 is easily positioned to win, so the right game It belongs to area 7B.

  In a normal state, the player does not open the special variable winning ball device 20 and the variable winning ball device 15 is not released with high frequency even if the game ball is passed through the gate 32. Therefore, the player aims at the left game area 7A. A left strike is made to strike the ball, and the game ball is awarded to the first start winning opening 13a. In the high base state (which is also a high probability state in this example), when the game ball is passed through the gate 32, the variable winning ball device 15 is released at a high frequency, so that the right to hit the right game area 7B and hit the game ball A hit is made and the game ball is awarded to the second start winning opening 13b. In the big hit gaming state, since the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the player hits the right game area 7B and hits the game ball to the right, and wins the game ball to the normal attacker 20A or the probability variation attacker 20B.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the special symbol display 8b is executing variable display of the second special symbol, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, which makes it easy to grasp the progress of the game. it can.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling and soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game and battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game and battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the lower right position on the game board 6, there are a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a that performs variable display of the first special symbol as identification information and derivation display of the stop symbol, and a second special symbol. A second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for performing variable display and derivation display of the stop symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a can display the LED 403 as a first display unit that performs variable display of the first special symbol, and the numbers 0 to 9, and the stop symbol derivation display ( 7 segment LED404 as a 2nd display part which performs a stop display) is comprised. In the first special symbol display 8a, the LED 403 keeps blinking repeatedly turning on and off at a predetermined time interval during variable display, and the LED 403 is turned off while the fluctuation is stopped, and the 7-segment LED 404 is turned on according to the display result. A predetermined LED (segment) among the constituent LEDs is turned on.

  A second special symbol display 8b is provided at the upper right position of the first special symbol display 8a. In this embodiment, the second special symbol display unit 8b can display the LED 405 as a first display unit that performs variable display of the second special symbol, and the numbers 0 to 9, and the stop symbol derivation display ( 7 segment LED406 as a 2nd display part which performs a stop display) is comprised. In the second special symbol display 8b, the LED 405 continues to blink and repeats turning on and off at predetermined time intervals during variable display, and the LED 405 is turned off while the fluctuation is stopped, and the 7-segment LED 406 is turned on according to the display result. A predetermined LED (segment) among the constituent LEDs is turned on.

  The first special symbol type and the second special symbol type that are stopped and displayed on the second display part of each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, each of the second display units may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13a or the second start winning opening) After passing 13b (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an aspect of the second special symbol display 8b when the second special symbol is changing (during variable display) and when the change is stopped (when the stopped symbol is derived and displayed). As shown in FIG. 2A, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the LED 405 blinks in a predetermined pattern, and at this time, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 406 are turned off. When the fluctuation time elapses, the LED 405 is turned off, and a predetermined segment of the segments of the 7-segment LED 406 is turned on, so that a display result is derived and displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 2B, in the case of 15R big hit A, each segment forming “9” is turned on, and in the case of a loss, the segment forming “−” is turned on. In the example of FIG. 2, the second special symbol display 8b is illustrated during the variation of the second special symbol and when the variation is stopped. However, the variation of the first special symbol (during variable display) and The aspect of the first special symbol display 8a at the time of the fluctuation stop (during derivation display of the stop symbol) is the same as this.

  In this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol differs for each variation pattern command to be described later (FIG. 11), but the symbol fixed stop time of the special symbol (period in which the display result is derived and displayed on the 7-segment LEDs 404 and 406) ) Is uniformly 0.5 seconds. However, in the state where the next variable display does not start immediately after the symbol fixed stop time of the special symbol elapses (the state where the big hit gaming state or the total number of pending storage becomes 0), the display result of the variable display executed last is It is assumed that 7-segment LEDs 404 and 406 are continuously displayed.

  Here, among the variation pattern commands shown in FIG. 11, the ultrashort PX1-1 (displaced by the ultrashort variation) and the ultrashort PX1-2 (big hit by the ultrashort variation) are as short as 0.2 seconds. This command is selected only in the high base state (special symbol short time state), but is selected with a relatively high probability in the high base state. And, it does not have a plurality of display parts of the first display part (LED 405) and the second display part (7-segment LED 406) as in this embodiment, and the variable display of the ultrashort variation pattern can be performed with only one display part. When trying to perform the derivation display of the stop symbol, since the change time is extremely short, the player cannot grasp whether the symbol is changing or the stop symbol is displayed. For example, even if a 7-segment LED is used to perform variable display by lighting each segment in a relay manner, and a stop symbol is derived and displayed after the end of the variable time, the 7-segment LED is still variably displayed. It is difficult for the player to determine whether there is a stop symbol or a display of the stop symbol. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the LED 405 that performs variable display and the 7-segment LED 406 that performs derivation display of stop symbols are separated as separate display units, so whether variable display is performed, Alternatively, it is easy for the player to grasp whether the stop symbol derivation display is performed.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9a, 9b, 9c, and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol after the effect symbol, the special symbol, and the normal symbol described later. . In this embodiment, the 4th symbol display area 9a for the 1st special symbol as the 1st display section where the 4th symbol variation display for the 1st special symbol is done in synchronism with the variation display of the 1st special symbol. As a second display unit in which the stop display (red display or blue display) of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed when the stop display of the first special symbol (the derivation display of the stop symbol) is performed And a fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol. In addition, a 4th symbol display area 9c for the 2nd special symbol as a 1st display part in which the 4th symbol variation display for the 2nd special symbol is performed in synchronization with the 2nd special symbol variation display, Second special display as a second display unit in which the stop display (red display or blue display) of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed when the special symbol stop display (stop symbol derivation display) is performed A fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols is provided.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display areas 9a and 9b for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol The 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d for 2 special symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the 4th symbol indicates that the 4th symbol display areas 9a and 9c are displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, the 4th symbol display area 9a for the 1st special symbol is black, the 4th for the 2nd special symbol). The symbol display area 9c is white), and is realized by continuing a blinking state in which lighting (display) and extinguishing (non-display) are repeated at predetermined time intervals. A variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a (LED403 in the present embodiment), and a variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol. Are synchronized. A variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b (LED405 in this embodiment), and a variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the second special symbol. Are synchronized. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a (7-segment LED 404 in the present embodiment), the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol displays a display color (for example, reminiscent of the big hit) It remains lit (displayed) in red. The display color may be varied depending on the type of big hit (either 15R big hit A or 15R big hit B). In addition, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a (7-segment LED 404 in the present embodiment), the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol is displayed with a display color (for example, reminiscent). It remains lit (displayed) in blue.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (7-segment LED 406 in this embodiment), the fourth special symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol displays a display color (for example, reminiscent of the big hit) It remains lit (displayed) in red. The display color may be varied depending on the type of big hit (either 15R big hit A or 15R big hit B). Further, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 8b (7-segment LED 406 in this embodiment), the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol displays a display color (for example, reminiscent of the off). It remains lit (displayed) in blue.

  FIG. 3 is a diagram showing aspects of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol during the variation (during variable display) and when the variation is stopped (when the stopped symbol is derived and displayed). As shown in FIG. 3A, during variable display of the fourth special symbol, the fourth symbol display area 9c blinks in a predetermined pattern (white display and non-display are repeated). At this time, the fourth symbol display area 9d is not displayed. The 4th symbol display area 9a for the 1st special symbol is in a lighting state (black display state), and the 4th symbol display area 9b is in a non-display state. Then, when the fluctuation time has elapsed and the display result of the second special symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 3B, the fourth symbol display area 9c is turned on (white display), If the symbol display area 9d is in a lighting state according to the display result, for example, if it is a big hit, it will be displayed in red, and if it is off, it will be displayed in blue. In addition, in the example of FIG. 3, the display mode of the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d when the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol is changing and when the change is stopped is illustrated. The display mode of the fourth symbol display areas 9a and 9b during the variation of the fourth symbol and when the variation is stopped is the same as this.

  Here, a plurality of first display parts (fourth symbol display area 9c for the second special symbol) and second display parts (fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol) as in the present embodiment are assumed. If there is no display part and only one display part is used to perform variable display of the ultra-short variation pattern and derivation display of the stop symbol, the variation time is extremely short, so the variable is being displayed or the stop symbol is displayed. The player cannot grasp whether it is. For example, using only the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 2nd special symbol, the variable display is performed by blinking the area, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed (stopped display in a predetermined color) after the end of the variation time. Even so, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the fourth symbol display area 9c for the second special symbol is variably displayed or whether the stop symbol is derived and displayed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the second special symbol in which variable display is performed, and a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which stop symbol derivation display is performed. Is separated as a separate display unit, so that the player can easily grasp whether variable display is being performed or whether a stop symbol is being derived.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning port 13a is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13a is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 14a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 13b through which a game ball can be won is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13a. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 13b is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 15a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 13b (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. Here, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 13b. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13a and the second start winning opening 13b may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 13b is provided. However, the first starting winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13a are provided. Any of the start winning openings 13b may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 13b. The first start winning opening 13a is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning port 13a is further reduced, or the first start winning port is set. The winning rate of the second starting winning port 13b is such that the nails are densely arranged around 13a, or the nail arrangement around the first starting winning port 13a is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning port 13a. You may make it make higher than the winning rate of the 1st start winning opening 13a.

  On the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13a, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed 4. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising two displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory display 18a increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 13b, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is provided a total pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number (total number of pending pending storage) that is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. ing. In this embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. . In this embodiment, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the first hold memory and the second hold memory are displayed side by side in the winning order to the first start winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b, It is displayed in a manner capable of recognizing whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). Note that, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the first reserved memory display unit that displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory display unit that displays the second reserved memory number are separated from each other (for example, the first reserved memory number). The on-hold storage display unit may be provided on the left side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second on-hold storage display unit may be provided on the right side of the lower part of the display screen.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a (LED 403 in this embodiment) and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b (LED 405 in this embodiment) and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  In the decorative part around the effect display device 9, there is provided a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 86 and moves forward of the effect display device 9 when the motor 86 rotates. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the movable member 78 operates only when the super reach D is executed as an effect. Here, since the super reach D is an effect mode that is selected only when the big hit A is generated, the movement of the movable member 78 can notify the player of the occurrence of the big hit A.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a normal attacker 20 </ b> A as a first special variable winning ball device is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The normal attacker 20A includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when displayed, the open / close plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21a in the first to fourteenth rounds, so that the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. Become. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is led to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the count switch 23a.

  Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening which is normally opened in the attacker 20A, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. More prize balls are paid out than when (entry). Therefore, if the special winning opening is opened in the normal attacker 20A, the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal attacker 20A, if the 1st prize winning opening is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the winning prize opening to obtain the winning ball. Become.

  In addition, a probability variation attacker 20B as a second special variable winning ball device is provided obliquely above and to the right of the variable winning ball device 15. The probability variation attacker 20B includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the game is played, the open / close plate is controlled to open by the solenoid 21b in the fifteenth round, so that the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is led to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the probability variation detection switch 24a. When the game ball is detected by the probability change detection switch 24a, the game state after the end of the specific game state becomes a high probability state (also referred to as a probability change state) that is more easily controlled to the specific game state than the normal state. Even if the probability variation attacker 20B is released, if a game ball is not detected by the probability variation detection switch 24a, the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state becomes the normal state.

  Based on the detection of the game ball by the probability variation detection switch 24a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the probability variation attacker 20B, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. More prize balls are paid out than when (entry). Therefore, if the special winning opening is opened in the probability variation attacker 20B, the first state advantageous to the player is obtained. On the other hand, if the big prize opening is closed in the probability variation attacker 20B, the game ball cannot be passed through (entered) into the big prize opening to obtain a prize ball, which is a disadvantageous second state for the player. .

  Here, the probability variation attacker 20B functions as a first specific area that is controlled to a high probability state by allowing the game medium to pass therethrough. Unlike the first specific area, the normal attacker 20A is in a high probability state even if the game medium passes. It functions as a second specific area that is not controlled.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/300, and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is 1/30. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C, as a type of the specific gaming state, a jackpot A having a long opening time of the probability variation attacker 20B (for example, performing a long release for 29 seconds) and a probability variation attacker There is a big hit B of 20B with a short opening time (for example, performing a short opening for 1 second). Therefore, if a big hit A occurs, if the game ball is continuously hit, the game ball wins almost 100% during the opening time, and the game state after the big hit A is changed to a certain change state. On the other hand, if a big hit B occurs, the probability that the game ball will win during the opening time is low even if the game ball continues to be hit. high.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is ended based on the winning of the game ball to the probability variation attacker 20B in the big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, every time variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the high probability state, the probability variation falling lottery is executed. In this probability variation drop lottery, the decision of `` no probability variation fall '' or `` with certain probability fall '' is made by lottery using random numbers, and the high probability state is continued based on the decision that `` no probability variation fall '', The high-probability state ends based on the determination that “there is a fall”. That is, in the present embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, the high probability state is controlled based on the winning of the game ball within the opening time of the probability changing attacker 20B. Based on the fact that either the game ball did not win within the opening time of 20B (2) or that it was determined that there was a “probable fall” in the high probability state, the “probable fall” was established. Controlled by the state.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the left side of the middle stage of the game board 6. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 includes an LED 401 as a first display unit that performs variable display of normal symbols, and an LED 402 as a second display unit that performs derivation display (stop display) of stop symbols. The In the normal symbol display 10, the LED 401 keeps blinking repeatedly turning on and off at a predetermined time interval during variable display, the LED 401 is turned off while the fluctuation is stopped, and the LED 402 is turned on according to the display result. In the case of (1)) or in the off state (in the case of disconnection).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed when the LED 401 is in a blinking state in which the lighting state and the unlighting state are alternately repeated. Then, when the LED 402 is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit, and when the LED 402 is turned off, it is off. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined winning symbol (in this embodiment, this means that the LED 402 is in a lighting state), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. Become. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be won in the second start winning port 13b). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is a high probability state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a variation display result of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) ), The probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, so that the high base state is achieved.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an aspect of the normal symbol display 10 when the normal symbol is changing (during variable display) and when the change is stopped (when the stopped symbol is derived and displayed). As shown in FIG. 4A, during normal variable display, the LED 401 blinks in a predetermined pattern, and at this time, the LED 402 is turned off. When the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 4B, the LED 401 is turned off, and the LED 402 is turned on (in the case of hit) or turned off (in the case of disconnection), and the display result is derived and displayed. The

  Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened to 0.2 seconds in a high base state (normal symbol short state) which will be described later. In such a normal symbol short-time state, it does not have a plurality of display units such as the first display unit (LED 401) and the second display unit (LED 402) as in the present embodiment, and only one display unit displays the normal symbol. When the variable display and the stop symbol derivation display are to be performed, the change time is extremely short, so that the player cannot grasp whether the change is in progress or the stop symbol is displayed. For example, even if the LED 1 is used for variable display by blinking and the stop symbol is derived and displayed after completion of the fluctuation time (lights up if it is a hit, lights off if it is off), the LED is still in a variable display or It is extremely difficult for the player to determine whether the stop symbol is derived and displayed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the LED 401 that performs variable display and the LED 402 that performs stop symbol derivation display are separated as separate display units, so that variable display is performed, or It is easy for the player to know whether the stop symbol derivation display is being performed.

  In the vicinity of the normal attacker 20A, winning holes 29a to 29d of the normal winning device are provided, and the game balls that have won the winning holes 29a to 29c are detected by the winning hole switch 30a, and the gaming balls that have won the winning holes 29d are the winning holes. It is detected by the switch 30b. Each of the winning holes 29a to 29d constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls when the winning balls 29a to 29d are won is 10 and the gaming balls pass (enter) through the first starting winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. More prize balls will be paid out. The first start winning opening 13a, the second starting winning opening 13b, the large winning opening of the normal attacker 20A, and the large winning opening of the probability variation attacker 20B also constitute a winning area that accepts a game ball and allows winning.

  In the lower part of the game area 7, there is an out port 26 for absorbing game balls that have not won. In addition, four speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left, right, top, and bottom of the outside of the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b, and a right frame LED 28c are provided. The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. Here, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that when the hitting operation handle 5 is operated (rotated by a predetermined angle), the game balls are launched into the game area 7 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13a and is detected by the first start port switch 14a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13a. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 13b and is detected by the second start port switch 15a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 13b. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are stopped when a certain time has elapsed. If the special symbol at stop (stop symbol) is a big hit symbol (specific display result), it will be “big hit”. If the special symbol at stop (stop symbol) is displayed differently from the big hit symbol, "

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol corresponding to “15R big hit A” or “15R big hit B” is stopped and displayed, it shifts to the 15 round big hit gaming state. In the big hit game state, the big winning opening of the normal attacker 20A is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, eight) of winning balls are generated. As a result, the round in which the normal attacker 20A is changed to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is executed. In this way, after closing the grand prize opening during the execution of the round, by closing it, the normal attacker 20A is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous for the player, and one round is finished. Let me. In the big hit game state, 15 out balls (prize balls) are obtained each time a game ball wins the normal winning opening of the attacker 20A.

  In the 15-round big hit game state, the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening of the normal attacker 20A is opened is a predetermined number of rounds (for example, “14”), and the remaining one round is a large amount of the probability change attacker 20B. It is a round in which the winning opening is opened. That is, in the first to 14th rounds excluding the predetermined round (the 15th round in the present embodiment), the big winning opening of the normal attacker 20A is opened, and in the 15th round which is the predetermined round, the big winning opening of the probability variation attacker 20B is opened. It becomes a state.

  Specifically, in the fifteenth round when the big hit symbol corresponding to “15R big hit A” is stopped as a special symbol, the probability variation attacker 20B has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, eight). During the period until the winning ball is generated, the large winning opening is opened (long opening). Further, in the fifteenth round when the big hit symbol corresponding to “15R big hit B” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, the probability variation attacker 20B is shorter than the case of “15R big hit A” for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) or During the period until a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls is generated, the large winning opening is opened (short opening).

  In the jackpot game state, when a game ball wins more than a predetermined number of balls (one ball in the present embodiment) in the jackpot of the probability variation attacker 20B, the probability variation control (probability change) is performed after the jackpot game state is finished. Control) is controlled to a probability variation state (high probability state). In this probability changing state, in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state.

  In other words, in this embodiment, in both 15R big hit A and 15R big hit B, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the big winning opening of the probability changing attacker 20B and shift to the probability changing state after the big hit gaming state ends. There is a possibility that the game ball does not win the winning hole and does not shift to the probable state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Is more likely than 15R big hit B.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit gaming state is reached and a game ball is won in the probability variation attacker 20B, the gaming state shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished, and the game ball is started and won. A transition is made to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so as to be easy (that is, the execution condition of variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established).

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high base state, the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is lower than when the gaming state is not the high base state (when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state)). While shifting to the normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability of becoming a winning symbol is increased, the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended (also referred to as the open extended state), and it becomes easy to start winning. In the open extended state, the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be longer than that in the normal state. The probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is, for example, 2/11 in the low base state, but 2/11 in the high base state. Further, the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is, for example, 0.3 seconds (× 1 time) in the low base state, and 5.8 seconds (× 1 time) in the high base state. Become. It should be noted that, instead of extending the opening time per turn of the variable winning ball device 15, by increasing the number of times of opening (for example, the number of times of opening in the low base state is one, in the high base state The total number of opening times may be increased to shift to the opening extended state by increasing the number of opening times to 3), and the opening time per time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended and released. You may make it transfer to an open extension state by increasing the frequency | count.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high base state, the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to the normal symbol short-time state in which the normal symbol change time (variable display period) is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases, and the start winning is easily achieved. The normal symbol change time (variable display period) in the normal symbol display 10 is, for example, 10 seconds in the low base state, but 0.2 seconds in the high base state. Thus, by shifting to the normal symbol short-time state, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended, making it easier to start a prize. Become.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that the symbol fixed stop time of a normal symbol (a period during which the display result is derived and displayed on the LED 402) is uniformly 0.5 seconds. That is, after the normal symbol variable display ends, after the symbol determination stop time of 0.5 seconds, if the display result is a hit, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, and if it is off, the next variable display is displayed. Be started. However, the state in which the next variable display is not started immediately after the normal symbol fixed stop time has elapsed (the state in which the number of stored symbols of the normal symbol is 0 or the variable display result is hit, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state. The display result of the variable display executed last is continuously displayed on the LED 402 (the lighting state or the extinguishing state is continued).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a high base state, the state shifts to a special symbol time-saving state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the special symbol short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol is shortened. It is possible to reduce the situation where an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the frequency of entering the big hit gaming state increases. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol (variable display period) and the variation time of the effect symbol (variable display period) are 1.5 seconds at the shortest in the low base state (in the case of deviation in the shortened variation). On the other hand, in the high base state, the shortest time is 0.2 seconds (in the case of a shift with a super shortening variation and in the case of a big hit with a super shortening variation). In addition, in the low base state, the shortening variation can be selected only when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, whereas in the high base state, the non-reach is shifted regardless of the total number of pending storages. A very short variation is always selected.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the variable symbol display time of the special symbol in the high base state is set to 0.2 seconds at the shortest. Selected with high probability. When 0.2 seconds, which is the shortest variable display period of the special symbol, is added to 0.5 seconds, which is the display period of the stop symbol (design fixed stop time), it is 0.7 seconds. That is, in the high base state, the special symbol variable display is executed with a period of approximately 0.7 seconds. On the other hand, since the game ball firing interval is 0.6 seconds as described above, both periods are substantially the same.

  Thus, by setting the period of variable display of the special symbol in the high base state to be substantially the same as or less than 0.6 seconds that is the shooting interval of the game balls, it is fired to the right game area 7B in the high base state. Even if the game ball has won the second start prize opening 13b with a high probability (for example, 90%), the game ball will enter the second start prize opening 13b with the number of reserved memories reaching the upper limit (4). The variable display is not executed because a prize has been won]].

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by shifting to the normal symbol probability changing state, the open extended state, the normal symbol short-time state, and the special symbol short-time state shown above, the high-base state that makes it easy to win a start is made. I have to. In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the states shown above (normal symbol probability changing state, open extended state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state) (high You may make it move to a base state. In addition, it is easy to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state) ( You may make it shift to a high base state).

  In the present embodiment, the timing for controlling to the high probability state and the timing for controlling to the high base state are made coincident with each other, and it is set as the end of the big hit gaming state in which the winning to the probability variation attacker 20B has been won. The timing for ending the high probability state is matched with the timing for ending the high base state, and (1) the timing at which the variable display is started when the display result of the variable symbol special display is a jackpot symbol, And (2) the timing at which the variable display is started when it is determined that “there is a probability change fall” in the probability change drop lottery performed at the timing at which the variable symbol special display is started.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, one game ball is a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball has won the second start prize opening 13b (based on the detection of the game ball by the second start slot switch 15a). Shall be paid out as In this way, if the number of winning balls when winning at the second starting prize opening 13b is 1, even if all the game balls that have been fired in the high base state are awarded to the second starting prize opening 13b, Prize balls exceeding the number of played balls are not paid out, and the player is not overly advantageous in the high base state. Therefore, the right game area 7B can be configured so that the game balls launched toward the right game area 7B win the second start winning opening 13b with a very high probability.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a gate 32 is provided in the right game area 7 </ b> B, and a game ball launched into the right game area 7 </ b> B in the right-handed state is a game nail disposed above the gate 32. It is guided by 38 and passes through the gate 32. The game nails 38 are arranged so that game balls that have been hit right and flowed down easily pass through the gate 32, and the game balls pass through the gate 32 with high probability during right hit.

  The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 collides with the game nail disposed below the gate 32 and flows down while changing the course, but eventually the guide member 39a or the guide member disposed further below the gate 32 It drops to the guide surface (upper surface) 39b with high probability and is guided to the variable winning ball device 15 by the guiding members 39a to 39c and the game nail 40 disposed between the guiding member 39b and the variable winning ball device 15. Is done. That is, most of the game balls that have passed through the gate 32 are guided to the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Therefore, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball guided by the gaming nail 40 wins the second start winning opening 13b with a high probability.

  Note that a path of the game ball is configured by the guide members 39b and 39c, and the probability variation attacker 20B is arranged on the path. Therefore, if the probability variation attacker 20B is released for a long time (long release) during a right strike, the game ball wins the big winning opening of the probability variation attacker 20B with a very high probability. In addition, the game ball that is driven into the right game area 7B by the guide member 39c and the game nail does not win the first start winning opening 13a.

  The game ball guided by the guide members 39b and 39c and the game nail 40 is further guided toward the normal attacker 20A when the variable winning ball device 15 is not opened, and when the variable winning ball device 15 is open, the normal attacker 20A It is supposed to win the prize winning. Therefore, in rounds 1 to 14 in the big hit gaming state, if the player hits the right and hits the game ball into the right game area 7B, the game ball passes through the front of the probability changing attacker 20B and the periphery of the variable winning ball device 15. In general, it can be expected to win a big prize opening of the attacker 20A. Also, in round 15 in the big hit gaming state, if the player hits the right and places the game ball in the right game area 7B, the game ball passes in front of the probability variation attacker 20B, and therefore wins the big winning opening of the probability variation attacker 20B. Can be expected (occurrence of probability change).

[Opening period of variable winning ball equipment]
As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high base state, most of the game balls driven into the right game area 7B pass through the gate 32 and are guided to the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Here, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 in the high base state (1) and reaches the variable winning ball apparatus 15 (2), the game ball passes through the gate 32. When the variable display of the normal symbol started with the game has not yet ended, the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is not started, and the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 13b. In this example, after the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 has passed through the variable winning ball device 15, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (3), and the display result becomes a win, so that the variable winning ball device 15 The opening is started (4), and the opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is finished after a predetermined period (5). Also, if the game ball passes through the gate 32 in the high base state (1) and reaches the variable winning ball device 15 (2), the variable symbol of the normal symbol started with the passage of the gate 32 is displayed. Even if the game has already ended (even if the timing of (3) is earlier than (2)), if the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 has not started, the game ball is in the second start winning prize. Do not win the mouth 13b.

  In the example of FIG. 83, the period from the game ball passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 (the period from (1) to (2)) is T1, and the game ball gate 32 The period (from (1) to (4)) until the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is released after the display result is successful after the variable symbol display starts with the passage is t1, and the game The period from the start of variable display of the normal symbol as the ball gate 32 passes through to the time when the display result is a hit and the open state of the variable winning ball device 15 is started until the open state ends ((1 ) To (5)). At this time, since T1 <t1, the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 does not win the second start winning opening 13b as it is.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 in the high base state (1) and reaches the variable winning ball device 15 (2), it has already passed through the gate 32. When the variable display of the normal symbol started with the end is finished (3) and the open state of the variable winning ball device 15 based on the winning of the display result is also ended (4) (5), The game ball does not win the second start winning opening 13b. In this way, even when T1> t2, the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 does not win the second start winning opening 13b as it is.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when winning in the second start winning opening 13b is 1. Accordingly, if the frequency at which the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is led to the out port 26 without winning the second start winning port 13b is increased, even if the game ball is in a high base state that is advantageous to the player. As a result, the number of players holding the ball will decrease, and the willingness to play will also decrease. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, a period (a period from (1) to (2)) T1 from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 until it reaches the variable winning ball device 15 The period from the start of variable display of normal symbols as the ball gate 32 passes through to the time when the display result is a hit and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened (period from (1) to (4)) It is longer than t1, and after the display of the normal symbol is started as the game ball passes through the gate 32, the display result is a win and the open state of the variable winning ball device 15 is started. So that the normal symbol variation time in the high base state and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 are controlled so as to be shorter than the period t2 (period from (1) to (5)). Yes.

  That is, by setting t1 <T1 <t2, it is possible for the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 to win the second start winning opening 13b as it is. By doing in this way, it is suppressed that it passed through the gate 32 in the high base state but was not led to the second start winning opening 13b and led to the out opening and wasted, and the player becomes disadvantageous. To prevent a decline in gaming motivation.

  Here, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, there are a large number of game nails (for example, game nails or game nails 40 above the guide members 39a and 39b) between the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 15. Has been placed. Therefore, even if the game ball firing interval is constant at 0.6 seconds, during the period (T1) from when each game ball passes through the gate 32 until it reaches the variable winning ball device 15, Variation occurs due to collision with game nails. As a result, when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and wins the second start winning port 13b during the opening period of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 (t1 <T1 <t2), A case (t1> T1 or T1> t2) occurs that passes through the gate 32 but reaches the variable winning ball device 15 before or after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is completed. In order to suppress the latter case as much as possible, the average value or median of the period (T1) from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 until it reaches the variable winning ball device 15 is the opening start of the variable winning ball device 15 It is preferable to control the variable winning ball apparatus 15 so as to be an intermediate time point from the time point to the end of the opening (an intermediate time point between (4) and (5) shown in FIG. 5). Specifically, the opening start (t1) timing and the opening end (t2) timing of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are set so that (t2−t1) / 2 matches the average value or the median value of T1. It is good to control. By performing such timing control, more game balls that have passed through the gate 32 can be awarded to the second start winning opening 13b even in a case away from the average value or median value of T1.

  In the present embodiment, the variable symbol display time of the normal symbol in the high base state is set to 0.2 seconds, and the stop symbol display period (symbol fixed stop time) is 0 when the number of reserved symbols stored in the normal symbol is not zero. When combined with 5 seconds, it becomes 0.7 seconds. That is, in the high base state, variable display of normal symbols is executed in a cycle of approximately 0.7 seconds. On the other hand, since the game ball firing interval is 0.6 seconds as described above, both periods are substantially the same. Here, in the present embodiment, even in the high base state, there is a certain degree of probability that the display result of the normal symbol is lost (2/13). Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the high base state is set to a time (for example, 2 seconds) that is clearly longer than the game ball firing interval, the following problems occur.

  First, assuming that the second game ball is fired immediately after the first game ball (0.6 seconds later), the variable display result based on the fact that the first game ball has passed through the gate 32 is derived as out of place. At the point of time, a predetermined time has passed since the second game ball has passed through the gate 32 (there is already a case where the variable winning ball device 15 has already passed), the second game Even if the variable display result based on the passage of the ball is a win, the second game ball has already passed through the variable winning ball device 15 at the time when the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started accordingly. Therefore, the second start winning opening 13b is not won. However, as in the present embodiment, after the variation of the normal symbol is started (= after the game ball has passed through the gate 32), the display result becomes a hit and the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. By setting the period t1 (= period until the display result is lost and the next variable display is started) t1 to be approximately equal to or less than 0.6 seconds, which is the game ball firing interval, the first Approximately 0.7 seconds after the game ball passes through the gate, variable display based on the passage of the second game ball is started, and if the display result is successful, the second game ball is It becomes possible to win the 2 start winning opening 13b.

  In this way, by setting t1 to be approximately equal to or less than 0.6 seconds, which is the game ball firing interval, the gate 32 is passed in the high base state, but the second start winning opening 13b is not won and won. It is prevented from being wasted to the mouth and preventing the player from becoming disadvantaged so as not to lower the game motivation. In addition, the speed of digestion of the reserved memory of the normal symbol is increased, and the frequency of occurrence of the case [the variable display is not executed because the game ball has passed the gate 32 in a state where the number of the stored memories has reached the upper limit value (4)). Suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the game nails and the guide members 39a to 39c are arranged so that the game ball may be removed from the path from the gate 32 to the second start winning opening 13b. Specifically, a winning opening 29d is provided below the guiding member 39a, and a game ball that has passed or did not pass through the gate 32 can win the winning opening 29d. Usually, since such a winning opening has a larger number of winning balls (10 in this embodiment) than the starting winning opening, the game hall side adjusts the game nail to the winning opening 29d. By facilitating the winning, the high base state with the right strike can be made more advantageous to the player. In particular, when the number of winning balls in the second start winning opening 13b is 1 as in the present embodiment, not all the game balls that have been fired necessarily win the second starting winning opening 13b. Even in the base state, the player's number of balls will gradually decrease, but if the winning opening 29d is easy to win, the decrease in the number of balls in the high base state will be moderate, or The number of balls held will increase the player's willingness to play.

  On the other hand, if the game hall side has already adjusted the game nail so as to facilitate the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 13a or the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the passage of the gate 32, the base is further increased. If most of the game balls launched in the state pass through the gate 32 and can enter the second start winning opening 13b as it is, it may be excessively advantageous for the player. In addition, there are amusement halls that have a business form in which the player is not excessively advantageous in a high base state. That is, depending on the situation on the game hall side and the business form, it is necessary to adjust the winning rate to the second start winning opening 13b in the high base state. In such a case, by adjusting the game nail 40 disposed between the guide member 39b and the variable winning ball apparatus 15, it is possible to suppress the winning rate to the second start winning opening 13b. . For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the position closest to the variable winning ball device 15 among the game nails 40 a to 40 c that guide the gaming ball from the guiding member 39 b toward the variable winning ball device 15. The game nail 40a is adjusted to the right (adjusted from the dotted line position in FIG. 6 (b) to the solid line position), and the distance between the game nail 40a and the movable wing piece of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in the open state is set. Go away. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), compared to (a) before adjustment of the game nail 40a, the frequency at which the game ball falls before reaching the second start winning opening is increased, which is high for the player. It is possible to prevent the base state from becoming excessively advantageous. In this way, the winning rate to the second start winning opening 13b can be adjusted according to the circumstances of the game hall and the business form.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 7 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 is supplied with detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 14a, the second start port switch 15a, the count switch 23a, the probability variation detection switch 24a, and the winning port switches 30a and 30b. An input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, the solenoid 16 for opening / closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the solenoid 21a for opening / closing the opening / closing plate of the normal attacker 20A, and the solenoid 21b for opening / closing the opening / closing plate of the probability changing attacker 20B are driven in accordance with commands from the game control microcomputer 560. An output circuit 59 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer in accordance with data given from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Has been. This information output signal will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  Also, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c provided on the frame side of the game board via the lamp driver board 35. In addition, the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 8, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 8 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies a current to light emitters provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c based on signals for driving the LEDs and the lamp. In addition, a current is supplied to a decoration LED or the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.), and an area (output) where the output state of the output port is saved Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 18). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed except when the jackpot is caused by the super shortening variation (when the super shortening PX1-2 is selected as the variation pattern). . When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 14a, the second start port switch 15a, the count switch 23a, the probability variation detection switch 24a, and the winning port switches 30a and 30b are input via the input driver circuit 58. Then, the state determination is performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 14a, the second start port switch 15a, the count switch 23a, the probability variation detection switch 24a, and the winning port switches 30a and 30b. Processing is executed (step S30). Specifically, in response to winning detection based on one of the first starting port switch 14a, the second starting port switch 15a, the count switch 23a, the probability variation detecting switch 24a, and the winning port switches 30a and 30b being turned on, A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol variation is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (LED 401 is turned on and off) every 0.1 seconds until the end flag is set. In the case of the speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “lit” and 0 indicating “dark”) is switched every 0.1 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “non-reach”) when the variable display result is “out”.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Eventually, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. Variation patterns of reach PA1-4 and ultrashort PX1-1 are prepared.

  Here, the variation pattern of the super shortened PX1-1 has the shortest variation time of the special symbol of 0.20 seconds among the variable display modes of “non-reach”. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol may be referred to as a variable display mode of “out of ultra-shortening variation”. This variation pattern of the super shortening loss is selected only in the high base state.

  Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2, Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2, and Super PG1-1 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11, about the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2-3 to normal P2-3 as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol. Variation patterns of PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4, super PG1-2 to super PG1-3, and super shortened PX1-2 are prepared.

  Here, the variation pattern of the super shortened PX1-2 has the shortest variation time of the special symbol of 0.20 seconds among the variation patterns in which the variable symbol display result of the special symbol becomes the big hit symbol. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol may be referred to as a “super shortened variation big hit” variable display mode. The fluctuation pattern per this super shortening fluctuation big hit is selected only in the high base state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11, when using normal PB2-3 among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effect of a pseudo-continuous, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, when the variation time is fixed according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of Super Reach A with a pseudo-ream, the variation time is 32). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 0 (MR0): Determines whether or not there is a probability variation fall (for probability variation fall determination)
(2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) (for jackpot type determination)
(3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination).
(4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and then by using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-reams, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the gaming state is a normal state and is 15R big hit A, 15R big hit B, normal CA3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach. −1, normal CA3-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-ream, and super CA3-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type with super reach A and super reach B . In addition, when the gaming state is a normal state and is out of place, a non-reach CA2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect and a specific effect with no reach. Includes non-reach CA2-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern, non-reach CA2-3, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation that does not involve reach and specific effects, and a variation pattern that includes only normal reach Normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type, normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and a variation pattern with normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation Normal CA2-6, which is a variation pattern type that includes, Super Reach A, Super Reach Are type divided into a super CA2-7 a variation pattern type with.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state and 15R big hit B, special CA 3-4 which is a variation pattern type with super reach C and The super CA 3-3 which is a variation pattern type with Super Reach A and Super Reach B and the super shortened CA 3-6 which is a variation pattern type with a super short variation jackpot. In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state and 15R big hit A, it is a special CA3-4 which is a variation pattern type with super reach C and a variation pattern type with super reach D. They are classified into special CA3-5 and super-shortened CA3-6, which is a variation pattern type with a super-shortened variation jackpot.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 10, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (random 0) probability variation fall determination random number, (random 1) jackpot type determination random number, and (random 4). The counter is incremented (added by 1) to generate a random number for determination per ordinary symbol. That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The big hit determination table is an example of determination data storage means, and numerical data for the hold storage stored in the hold storage means (the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer shown in FIG. 25B) is stored. As data for determining whether or not it is numerical data indicating that the jackpot is to be controlled, it is determined in the normal judgment data (normal jackpot judgment value) for judgment in the normal state and in the high probability state (probability variation state). Data for high-probability judgment (probability change jackpot judgment value) to be stored, a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and a jackpot judgment value to be compared with random R is set. It is a table.

  The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 13 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 13 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 13A is a jackpot determination value.

  Here, since the probability change big hit judgment value does not include the normal time big hit judgment value, the random R (for example, 1020) that matches the normal time big hit judgment value does not match the probability change big hit judgment value, and the probability variation big hit judgment is determined. Random R (for example, 2020) that matches the value does not match the normal big hit determination value. Therefore, if the game state changes, what was a big hit in the normal state will be lost in the probability change state, and what was a big hit in the probability change state will be lost in the normal state. . Therefore, in the present invention, the execution of the pre-reading notice is restricted until the game state after the jackpot is stored is controlled to the normal state or the probability change state after the jackpot holding memory is stored (in this example, Forbidden) to eliminate the risk of informing the player of indefinite information. A modification shown in FIG. 13A 'will be described later.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B). Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  FIGS. 13B and 13C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Of these, FIG. 13B determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13a (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 13C shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 13b (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination table 131a, 131b determines that the jackpot type is “15R jackpot A” based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type when the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine one of “15R big hit B”. The number of rounds executed in the big hit game is not limited to 15 rounds, and may be other round numbers. Also, the types of jackpots are not limited to two, and may be three or more.

  FIG. 13D is an explanatory diagram showing a probability variation fall determination table 131c stored in the ROM 54, and holds storage based on a game ball winning in the first start winning opening 13a or the second starting winning opening 13b. This is a table (common to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol) used when determining whether or not there is a probability change fall (when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed). The probability variation fall determination table 131c is a table that is referred to in a high probability state, and is referred to in order to determine “probability variation fall” or “probability variation fall” based on a random number (random 0) for probability variation fall determination. The

  14A and 14B are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132B. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132B determine the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type when the variable display result is determined to be the jackpot symbol in the normal state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 2) for use.

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132B includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of the super CA3-3 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 14A used when the big hit type is “15R big hit B” and the big hit type shown in FIG. 14 (A) used when the big hit type is “15R big hit A”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132B selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types in the normal state, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be made different. it can.

  As shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, in this embodiment, when “15R big hit A” or “15R big hit B” in the normal state, a random number for determining the variation pattern type (random If the value of 2) is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super The variation pattern type may include a variation pattern including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the 15R big hit B big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A and the 15R big hit A big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132B selected in the normal state, super reach (super reach A, super reach B). ) And a variation pattern type with pseudo-continuations and a super-reach (super reach A, super reach B) and a variation pattern type without pseudo-continuations.

  14C and 14D are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132D. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132D indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol in a high probability state, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on a random number for determination (random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132D includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, and includes super CA3-3, special CA3-4, A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of special CA3-5 and ultra-short CA3-6 is set.

  For example, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 14C used when the big hit type is “15R big hit B”, the special pattern CA3-4, super CA3-3, and super shortened CA3 are used as the variation pattern types. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 14D used when the big hit type is “15R big hit A”, the special CA3-4 and the special CA3-5 are used as the variation pattern types. Super short CA3-6 is assigned. As will be described later, the variation pattern type of the super shortened CA 3-6 is assigned the variation pattern of the super shortened PX1-2, which is a variable display mode for the super shortened variation big hit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with a very short variation time (0.2 seconds) at a constant rate in the high probability / high base state.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132D selected according to the big hit type are compared, the variation pattern type assigned according to the big hit type and the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type are different. ing. Therefore, according to the determination result of whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types in the high probability state, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types, and to change the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type Can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 14C and 14D, in this embodiment, in the case of “15R big hit A” or “15R big hit B” in the high probability state, a random number (figure pattern type determination random number ( If the value of random 2) is 1 to 149, it can be seen that the variable display with at least the super reach C is executed.

  In the present embodiment, super reach C and super reach D are not accompanied by pseudo-continuations. However, when a variation pattern involving pseudo runs is provided for super reach C and super reach D, the super reach C and super reach D are super The jackpot when the reach C and the super reach D are executed may be divided into a variation pattern type with pseudo-continuations and a variation pattern type without pseudo-continuations. In this case, in both the 15R big hit B big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C and the 15R big hit A big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132D selected in the high probability state, super reach (special CA3-4 or special CA3-5) and a variation pattern type accompanied by a pseudo-continuity and a super reach (special CA3-4 or special CA3-5) and a variation pattern type not accompanied by a pseudo-continuation are assigned.

  FIGS. 15A to 15D are explanatory diagrams illustrating the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 15 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 15B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more.

  FIG. 15C shows a variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss that is used when the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability / high base state) and it is determined that there is no probability variation fall by probability variation fall lottery. Show. When the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected, when the variation pattern type with super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is not selected (when non-reach is out of place, the super shortened CA 2-9 is As will be described later, the fluctuation pattern type of the super-shortened CA2-9 is assigned the fluctuation pattern of the super-shortened PX1-1, which is a variable display mode out of the super-shortened fluctuation. In, a shifted symbol is derived and displayed at a relatively high rate in a high probability / high base state with a very short variation time (0.2 seconds).

  When the gaming state is a high probability / high base state and it is determined that there is a probability change fall by the probability change fall lottery, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D shown in FIG. 15D is used. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> C and 135 </ b> B are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15C, a case is shown in which the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, and so on may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. The “expected degree (reliability)” for the jackpot indicates the appearance rate (probability) that the jackpot appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when jackpot is determined) / (when jackpot is determined and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is If it is 230-251, it turns out that the variable display accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed irrespective of the total number of reserved storage.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is If it is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo-ream or the slide effect) regardless of the total number of pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, as shown in this embodiment. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when a big hit occurs due to out-of-range or ultrashort fluctuation.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, when using the big hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately depending on whether the current gaming state is a probability variation state or a normal state, respectively. However, a common jackpot variation pattern type determination table may be used regardless of the current gaming state. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 15B is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), When the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is a high base state, the case of 1 or 2 having a smaller total number of pending storage However (or, for example, even when the number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit variation pattern determination table 137A stored in the ROM 54. The hit variation pattern determination table 137A is a random number for random pattern determination (random 3) according to the determination result of the jackpot type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the above. The winning variation pattern determination table 137A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is “big hit” Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to

  In the example shown in FIG. 16, as the variation pattern type, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and normal CA3, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity. -2 and a super CA 3-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving super reach (super reach A, super reach B) (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream together with super reach A and super reach B), and super Special CA3-4, which is a variation pattern type with reach C, Special CA3-5, which is a variation pattern type with super reach D, and Super shortening, which is a variation pattern type with super shortened variation (super shortened PX1-2) The case where it is classified into CA3-6 is shown. In this example, special CA 3-4, special CA 3-5, and ultra-short CA 3-6 are variation pattern types that are selected only in the high probability / high base state.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. In this example, special CA 2-8 and ultra-short CA2-9 are variation pattern types that are selected only in the case of a high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, when the display result of variable symbol special display is a big hit in a high probability state, special CA3-4 with super reach C or super reach D is used as the variation pattern type. The accompanying special CA 3-5 may be selected. Also, as shown in FIG. 15D, when the display result of the special symbol variable display is out of place in the high probability state, and it is determined that there is a probability variation fall in the probability variation drop lottery, the reach pattern type is super reach C. Special CA2-8 with is selected. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, when the special CA 3-4 is selected as the fluctuation pattern type, the super PG 1-2, which is a big hit pattern in the super reach C, is selected, and the special CA 3 is used as the fluctuation pattern type. When -5 is selected, super PG1-3, which is a variation pattern that is a big hit in super reach D, is selected. When special CA2-8 is selected as the variation pattern type, super PG1 that is shifted in super reach C is selected. -1 is selected.

  Here, in the present embodiment, only the special CA 3-4 and special CA 2-8 that can be selected in the high probability state are the variation pattern types accompanied by the super reach C. Therefore, when Super Reach C occurs, the player determines whether the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes a big hit symbol, or the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes an outlier symbol and falls from the probability change state. Recognize either result. In this embodiment, Super Reach C is an effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle, and when the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol is a big hit symbol, the effect that the ally character wins is executed, When the display result of the variable display of the symbol is out of the design and falls from the certain change state, the effect that the ally character is defeated (the enemy character wins) is executed. That is, when Super Reach C is generated, the player pays attention to the effect of the battle mode and expects the teammate character to win.

  On the other hand, the variation pattern type with super reach D is only the special CA 3-5 that can be selected in the high probability state, and the special CA 3-5 is selected only when the big hit A occurs. Therefore, when the super reach D occurs in the high probability state, the player recognizes that the display result of the variable display of the effect symbols becomes a big hit symbol and that a big hit A that causes the probability variation attacker 20B to be long open occurs. In addition, when the variable display of the production | presentation symbol which concerns on the super reach D is started, the accessory act | action effect which the movable member 78 operate | moves immediately after the start of variable display is performed. The player recognizes the occurrence of the big hit A by the operation of the movable member 78.

  18 and 19 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 11, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command).

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a combined pending storage number designation command for designating the combined pending storage number is transmitted as a command for designating the reserved storage count. It may be configured to transmit a command for designating the increased number of reserved memories. Specifically, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and when the second reserved memory increases, the second reserved memory number is designated. The second reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which one of the first starting winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b has been won is transmitted as the hold storage information, and the total number of reserved holds However, the effect control command to be transmitted as the stored storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the command indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased) is transmitted. (Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big win and the determination result of the type of the big win. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number among the winning determination results. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 27), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit at the time of starting winning, the big hit type, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined which range of the determination value the value falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit or a value for designating the type of jackpot is set, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designating command, the type of the big hit, and the variable category command. Based on the above, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes a predetermined determination value, the variation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 20, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not it is a big hit and the type of big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “15R big hit A”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “15R big hit B” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  21 and 22 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the start winning prize A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, if it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used for determining which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. The same applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 11, 21 to 32, and each fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 14A to 14D, 15C, and 15D. A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of a range of determination values assigned to the pattern type.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / high base state and out of place at the start winning, and further, it is determined that there is no sure change falling (No in step S202 of FIG. 26) by the sure change falling determination at the start winning, In step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is ultrashort CA2-9), the CPU 56 performs variation with “08 (H)” set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a high probability / high base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, and it is further determined that there is a surely falling fall (YES in step S202 in FIG. 26), a winning effect processing described later In step S232, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 251. In this example, since the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of special CA2-8), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “0A (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send 10 commands. The production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is the special CA 2-8 based on the reception of the variation category 10 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state and “15R big hit B” at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 74. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state and “15R big hit A” at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 38. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state and “15R big hit B” at the time of winning a start, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not the value of the random number is 1 to 149. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA 3-4), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “17 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 199 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). Send a variation category 28 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “18 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the ultrashort CA3-6). The changed category 29 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state and “15R big hit A” at the time of winning a start, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not the value of the random number is 1 to 149. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA 3-4), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “19 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 30 commands are sent. Next, the CPU 56 sets “1A (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 199 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the special CA 3-5). A variable category 31 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “1B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the ultrashort CA3-6). The changed category 32 command is transmitted.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 14 and 15), there is no mismatch between the determination result at the time of winning and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed. For this reason, when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 or super CA 3-3 is selected, a pre-reading notice effect described later may be executed on the variation display determined at the time of winning. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 are the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 (specifically, the variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  The “prefetching notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. In this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is executed immediately at the timing when the start winning for the variable display to be noticed occurs (a pre-reading notice effect in the form of “holding ball change” described later), and the notice object. The production starts from the variation display that starts after the start winning for the variation display becomes, and is continuously executed over a plurality of variation displays before the start of the variation display subject to the notice effect. (A pre-reading notice effect in the form of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, “countdown”, and “shooting” described later). However, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect is performed only once in the variable display before the start of the variable display subject to the notice effect. There may be. Also, for example, the notice effect is started from the change display before the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed until the change display immediately before the change display targeted for the notice effect. It may end, or it may perform a notice effect over a variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. Further, it is not always necessary to continuously execute the display over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect may be executed in a variable display of a plurality of times intermittently every other time or every second time. However, with regard to the look-ahead notice effect of the “countdown” and “shooting” modes described later, if the countdown or shooting is only once or intermittent, the effect becomes unnatural. It is desirable to carry out continuously.

  In this embodiment, regardless of the game state (for example, whether the game is in a high probability state or a high base state, whether or not a big hit game is being played) The winning determination process is executed, the symbol designating command shown in FIG. 20 is always transmitted, and the variation category command shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is transmitted. Then, based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit or reach is reached before the variation display of the notice target is started. Execute a prefetch notice to give a notice.

  However, after the jackpot holding memory is stored, until the game state after the jackpot controlled based on the holding memory is determined to be controlled to the normal state or the probability change state, the jackpot holding memory is determined. Execution of the pre-reading notice for the reserved memory based on the start winning that occurred after the storage of the game, and the execution of the pre-reading notice for the reserved memory based on the start winning that occurred during the variable display of the jackpot are restricted (prohibited in this example). . In addition, when it is determined that there is a deviation and a probability change fall at the time of the start winning prize, until the variable display based on the hold memory is started after the hold storage based on the start prize is made, It is assumed that the execution of the pre-reading notice with respect to the hold memory based on the start winning after the hold memory is restricted (prohibited in this example).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, if the first start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13a is turned on, that is, the start to the first starting winning opening 13a. If a winning has occurred, or if the second starting port switch 15a for detecting that the game ball has won the second starting winning port 13b is turned on, that is, the starting winning to the second starting winning port 13b. If this occurs, start-port switch passage processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed. If the first start port switch 14a or the second start port switch 15a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control processing based on the special symbol process flag value of 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 37), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22. In this embodiment, since the special symbol variation stop time (symbol fixed stop time) is set to 0.5 seconds, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” and then 0. It is preferable to update the value of the special symbol process flag to “5” or “0” after confirming that 5 seconds have passed.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoids 21a and 21b are driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 14a is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1222. If the first start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13a and the second start winning opening 13b. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1215).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13a), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 15a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 13b), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 14 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). 2 When the start port switch 15a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 25 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 25A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 25A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13a or the first Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the 2 start winning opening 13b. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), the winning order to the first start winning port 13a and the second starting winning port 13b is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 25B) ( Step S1216). Note that in the process of step S1216, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a probabilistic fall determination random number (random 0) that is a software random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type The determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start opening switch passage process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later. Note that the random number for probability variation fall determination and the random number for jackpot type determination may be hardware random numbers.

  FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 25 (B), a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a probability random fall determination random number (random 0) that is a software random number, and a big hit. A random number for type determination (random 1), a random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, based on the detected start winning, the CPU 56 executes a winning-time predictive change falling determination process for determining in advance whether or not there is a probability change falling at the start winning (step S1216A). Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process for determining in advance when starting a winning a change display result and a changing pattern type when a change based on the detected starting winning is executed (step S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1220), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1221).

  Note that by executing the processing of steps S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the design designation command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 100 each time the first start winning opening 13a is won.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13a occurs by executing the processing of steps S1218 to S1221, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the first start prize designation A set of four commands, that is, a command and a total pending storage number designation command, are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 15a is in an on state (step S1222). If the second start port switch 15a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 15a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1224), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 25B) ( Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a probability variation fall determination random number (random 0) that is a software random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type The determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, based on the detected start winning, the CPU 56 executes a winning-time predictive change falling determination process for determining in advance whether or not there is a probability change falling at the start winning (step S1227A). Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect processing (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1229), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1230). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1231), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1232).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1229 and S1230, the CPU 56 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designating command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 100 every time the second winning winning opening 13b is won.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 13b occurs by executing the processing of steps S1229 to S1232, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the second start prize designation A set of four commands, that is, a command and a total pending storage number designation command, are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the winning-change-probability falling determination process in steps S1216A and S1227A. In the winning probability variation fall determination process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state = high probability / high base state) is set (step). S201).

  If the high probability flag is not set in step S201 (NO), the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (steps S1217 and S1228).

  If the high probability flag is set in step S201 (YES), the CPU 56 refers to the probability variation fall determination table in FIG. ) And the probability variation fall determination value in the case where there is a probability variation fall shown in the left column of the probability variation fall determination table, and confirms whether or not they match (step S202). If the probability change fall random number (random 0) does not coincide with the probability change fall determination value in the case where there is a probability change fall (NO) in this step S202, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect processing (step S1217, step S1228). . On the other hand, if the probability variation fall determination random number (random 0) matches the probability variation fall determination value when there is a probability variation fall (YES) in step S202, the CPU 56 sets a winning determination probability variation fall flag (step S203). Winning effect processing (step S1217, step S1228) is executed.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217 and S1228. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state = high probability / high base state) is set (step S221). .

  If the high probability flag is not set in step S221 (NO), the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 and the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. And confirm whether or not they match (step S222). If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not coincide with the normal big hit determination value in step S222 (NO), the CPU 56 performs the process of step S224. On the other hand, if the big hit determination random number (random R) coincides with the normal big hit determination value in step S222 (YES), the CPU 56 performs the process of step S229.

  If the high probability flag is set in step S221 (YES), the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 and the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. And confirm whether they match (step S223). If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not coincide with the big hit determination value at the time of probability change (NO) in step S223, the CPU 56 performs the process of step S224. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (YES) in step S222, the CPU 56 performs the process of step S229.

  In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit in the special symbol normal processing to be described later, the big hit type is determined, or the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern setting processing. Separately, at the timing when the game ball starts to win the first start winning opening 13a or the second starting winning opening 13b, before the change display based on the start winning starts, the effect at the time of winning By executing the process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the jackpot will be a big hit, and which judgment value range the jackpot type and random number for variation pattern type judgment will be. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A pre-reading notice effect for notifying that it will be a big hit or super reach is displayed during the change display of the effect symbol.

  In the case of NO in step S222 or step S223, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command (step S224), and determines the current gaming state. Is performed (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set). Whether or not). Further, it is determined whether or not there is a probability change fall (specifically, whether or not the winning determination probability change fall flag is set).

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state and there is no sure fall. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21). If the threshold value is not less than 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21).

  Further, for example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 when it is determined that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state and that there is a probability change fall. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (that is, 1 to 251). Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21). If the threshold value is 99 or less (ie, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21). If the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21). Further, when the threshold value is 214 or less (that is, when it is 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 21).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  After the process of step S226, the CPU 56 resets the winning determination probability change flag (step S226A), and executes the process of step S232.

  If YES in step S222 or step S223, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13a (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first first) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “15R big hit A” or “15R big hit B”. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 13b (when the winning effect processing in step S1228 is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 13C. 131b is used to determine whether the big hit type is “15R big hit A” or “15R big hit B”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that “15R big hit A” is obtained, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R big hit A” to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “15R big hit B”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “15R big hit B” to the symbol designation command.

  In this embodiment, in step S230A, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set). Or not) is determined. Then, the CPU 56 sets each jackpot threshold value according to the jackpot type determined in step S229 and the gaming state determined in step S230A (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state and “15R big hit B”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (that is, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22).

  Further, for example, when the gaming state is determined to be the normal state and “15R big hit A”, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 38 and 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22).

  For example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state and “15R big hit B”, the threshold values 149 and 199 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 149 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22). If the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 150 to 199), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22). If the threshold value is not less than 199 (that is, 200 to 251), it is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22).

  Further, for example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 149 and 199 when the gaming state is determined to be the high probability / high base state and “15R big hit A”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 149 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “19 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22). If the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 150 to 199), it is determined that “1A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22). If the threshold value is not less than 199 (that is, 200 to 251), it is determined that “1B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 22).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226 and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 to determine which variation pattern type random number value is the determination value. Is determined (step S232).

  In steps S226 and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 14 and 15) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type determination table is set. May be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0 A (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) ”to“ 1B (H) ”is set to the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined even if it is determined that the win is determined in the determination at the time of winning a prize, If it is determined that this is the case, the range of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, when a big hit is made, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command which comprehensively indicates that the variation pattern type of the big hit may be transmitted. For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a prefetch notice effect described later may be executed.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  In step S51, the CPU 56 does not check the value of the total reserved memory number, but checks whether or not data is set in the first area of the reserved specific area. If it is not set, it may be determined that there is no reserved storage, and the process may proceed to step S51A.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 25A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol changes according to the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. Although the case where it is displayed is shown, you may comprise so that a variable display of any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. In this case, for example, when the state shifts to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning opening 13b provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, the CPU 56 sets the high probability high base state background. Controls sending specified commands. Further, when neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background control command, the change pattern command, the display result specifying command, and the total pending storage number subtraction specifying command are sequentially set for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the computer 100. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed with respect to the first start winning opening 13a, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed with respect to the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 13b. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S307 can be shared between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a probability variation drop lottery process (step S60A). FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the probability variation drop lottery process in step S60A. In the probability variation drop lottery process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state = high probability / high base state) is set (step S206). .

  If the high probability flag is not set in step S206 (NO), the CPU 56 executes the process of step 61.

  If the high probability flag is set in step S206 (YES), the CPU 56 reads random 0 (random number for probability variation fall determination) from the random number buffer area, and when there is a probability variation fall indicated in the left column of the probability variation fall determination table. It is compared with the probability change fall judgment value and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S207). If the random number for probability variation fall determination (random 0) does not coincide with the probability variation fall determination value in the case where there is a probability variation fall (NO) in step S207, the CPU 56 executes the process of step 61. On the other hand, if the probability variation fall random number (random 0) coincides with the probability variation fall determination value in the case where there is a probability variation fall (YES) in step S207, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation fall flag (step S208). Execute the process.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start-port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 13) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probable change state (normal state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 13A in the ROM 54 are set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 13A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 13A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, if the game ball wins the probability variation attacker 20B during the big hit game, it is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, it is reset when the next big hit occurs and the big hit flag is set.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the process proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 13B. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 13C.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“15R jackpot A” or “15R big hit A” or “ 15R jackpot B ") is determined as the jackpot type (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot type determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Do.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “15R jackpot A”, “01” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “15R jackpot B”, “02” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, either “7” or “9”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined as “15R big hit B”, “7” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “15R big hit A” is decided, “9” is designated as a special symbol stop symbol. decide.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set (Y), the CPU 56 uses the jackpot as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the high probability flag and the jackpot type. One of the variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B, 132C, 132D (see FIGS. 14A, 14B, 14C, and 14D) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state are set (step S95). ). The high probability flag and the high base flag are set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state at the end of the big hit gaming state, and are determined to be the probability change fall when the variable display for the big hit is started and by the probability change drop lottery process. It is reset when the variable display starts.

  If the high probability flag and the high base flag are not set (N in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more ( Step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 15A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 15B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the high probability flag and the high base flag are set (Y in step S95), that is, when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability change fall flag is set. Is confirmed (step S95A). If the probability fall flag is not set (N in step S95A), the variation pattern type determination table 135C for detachment (FIG. 15C) is used as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the probability fall flag is set (Y in step S95A), the variation pattern type determination table 135D for deviation (FIG. 15 (D )) Is selected (step S95B). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 15C may be selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 17). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 15C) used in a high probability / high base state and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 15B, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines N in step S95A, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 15A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and selects it in the process of steps S92, S98, S99, S101, or S95B. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a variation pattern determination table 137A (see FIG. 16) as a table used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 17) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high probability flag is set (step S107A). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step S107A), the process of step S108 is executed. If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S107A), it is confirmed whether or not the probability change fall flag is set (step S107B). If the probability change fall flag is not set (N in Step S107B), it is confirmed whether or not the big hit flag is set (Step S107F). If the big hit flag is not set (N in step S107F), the process of step S108 is executed.

  If the probability variation fall flag is set in step S107B (Y in step S107B), the CPU 56 resets the probability variation fall flag (step S107C), resets the high probability flag and the high base flag (step S107D), and sets the high The end of the probability / high base state is set (step S107E), and the process of step S108 is executed. Further, if the big hit flag is set in step S107F (Y in step S107F), the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag and the high base flag (step S107D), and sets the end of the high probability / high base state. (Step S107E), the process of Step S108 is executed.

  With the high probability / high base state end setting in step S107E, the random R and the big hit determination value (FIG. 13A) at the normal time (non-probability change) are compared in the big hit determination after this processing. become. Specifically, it is determined to be N in step S221, and the determination in step S222 (comparison between random R and normal jackpot determination value) is executed. In step S61, random R and normal jackpot determination are performed. The value is compared. Also, the high base state (the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is higher than the normal state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are higher than the normal state) Is ended, and the gaming state becomes a normal state (low probability / low base state).

  Here, as in this embodiment, in a gaming machine that performs control to end the high base state with the end of the high probability state, when the high probability state is ended based on the probability variation falling lottery, and in the jackpot gaming state When ending the high probability state based on the occurrence, it is necessary to perform control to end the high base state (steps described above). Here, in the high base state, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are higher than the normal state. In a gaming machine that performs such control, if the timing for ending the high base state based on the probability variation falling lottery and the timing for ending the high base state based on the occurrence of the big hit gaming state are different, during variable display, When the player observes the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 15, there arises a disadvantage that the player can determine the result of the variable display.

  Specifically, the high base state is terminated based on the fact that it is determined that the probability change falls when starting the variable display (for example, step S107E shown in the present embodiment). On the other hand, if the variable display starts, the big hit If the high base state is not terminated based on the flag being set, or if the timing for terminating the high base state is after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variable display, the player is in the variable display state. In addition, if the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased from the normal state, it can be determined that the winning game is a big hit, and if it is not increased, it is determined that the fall is a certain probability change, thereby reducing the interest of the game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the timing for ending the high base state when the probability fall falls (the timing for executing steps S107D and S107E after it is determined as Y in step S107B) and the high timing when the big hit occurs. The timing for ending the base state (the timing for executing steps S107D and S107E after Y is determined in step S107F) is made to coincide, and the player observes the opening time and the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. It is impossible to determine whether it is a probable fall or a big hit.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a non-reach variation pattern type determination table (including the non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 variation pattern types shown in FIG. 15) and a reach variation pattern type determination table (FIG. 15). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to pre-determine whether or not “non-reach” will occur and perform a pre-reading notice effect.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (see FIG. 18) of any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 3 designation in accordance with the determined jackpot type or deviation. Do.

  Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If the big hit flag is not set in step S110 (NO), that is, if it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S120), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S121), and the display result designation command transmission process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is set in step S110 (YES), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 2 designation command when the big hit type is “15R big hit A” (step S110). S111, S112), the process proceeds to step S121. Whether or not it is “15R big hit A” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is “15R jackpot B”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S114), and proceeds to step S121. Specifically, whether or not it is “15R big hit B” is determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. It is sufficient to set whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set in step S1121. Further, in this case, the set total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol variation display is ended or when the big jackpot is ended. do it.

  Next, if the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305) (step S150), and the special symbol. Terminate the stop process.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is set in step S131, the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state (step S132). Then, control for transmitting a big hit start designation command (command A001 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). Further, the number of times of opening (in this example, 15 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S135). The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Here, in the big hit A, 29 seconds are set as the round time of the normal attacker 20A in the 1st to 14th rounds and the round time of the probability variation attacker 20B in the 15th round. In the big hit B, the normal attacker 20A in the 1st to 14th rounds The round time of 29 seconds is set, and the round time of the 15th round probability variation attacker 20B is set to 1 second. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and a control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command (command A301 (H)) is performed (step S162). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), it is determined whether or not there has been a winning to the probability change attacker 20B during the big hit, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the probability change detection switch 24a. Confirm (step S165A). If there is no winning in the probability variation attacker 20B in this step S165A (NO), that is, if there is no detection of the game ball by the probability variation detection switch 24a, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the probability variation attacker 20B in step S165A (YES), that is, if there is a game ball detected by the probability variation detection switch 24a, the CPU 56 sets a high probability flag (step S166), The flag is set (step S168), and the gaming state is shifted to the high probability / high base state (step S169). By the high probability / high base state control start setting in step S169, the random R and the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (FIG. 13A) are compared after the process. Specifically, it is determined as Y in step S221, and the determination in step S223 (comparison between random R and jackpot determination value at the time of probability change) is executed. In step S61, jackpot determination at random R and the time of probability change is performed. The value is compared. Also, the high base state (the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is higher than the normal state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are higher than the normal state) It becomes.

  In this embodiment, the high base flag set in step S168 is also used to determine whether to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see step S27), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is a hit, If it is set, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The high base flag set in step S168 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time. In addition, in the case of a configuration that can be controlled even in the normal symbol variation state with an increased probability of winning the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol, the high base flag determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit. Also used to determine.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (Step S300) (Step S170), and ends the process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in S27 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 56 first checks whether the detection signal from the gate switch 32a provided in the gate 32 is in an on state, thereby detecting whether a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 has been detected. It is determined whether or not (S501). In S501, when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is turned on for a predetermined period, it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate (passed ball), Processing at the time of passing through the gate is executed (S502).

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in S502, the following process is executed. First, whether or not the number of general-purpose reserved storage, which is the number of general-purpose reserved storage data stored in the general-purpose reserved storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55, is a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). Determine whether or not. The usual figure storage unit stores a maximum of four random number numerical data for determining the display result of the normal symbol extracted when the gate pass of the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a as the normal figure storage data. It has a data storage area for storing. This ordinary reserved storage unit, like the above-described first reserved storage buffer and second reserved storage buffer, saves the order in which the ordinary reserved storage data is stored in an identifiable state, and changes according to the order. The general-purpose reserved storage data used for display is erased, and the data storage area is shifted one by one for the remaining general-purpose reserved storage data.

  In S <b> 502, when the number of ordinary map storage is less than the upper limit value, the CPU 56 extracts numerical data indicating random 4. Then, the extracted random 4 numerical data is set as general-purpose storage data in the first-order area of the data storage area that is not stored in the general-purpose storage section and is free. On the other hand, if the number of the general-purpose reserved memory reaches the upper limit value in the general-purpose reserved storage unit, the detection of the current game ball is invalidated, and the random number 4 is not newly extracted and stored.

  After the processing at the time of passing the gate and after it is determined in S501 that the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is in the OFF state, the following S510 to S514 are performed according to the value of the normal symbol process flag. Execute each process.

  The normal symbol normal process of S510 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 10 is to be started based on the presence / absence of the universal symbol storage data stored in the universal symbol storage unit. . At this time, for example, when there is the general-purpose hold storage data stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process of S511 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on whether or not the high base flag is set, it recognizes whether or not it is in a high base state (normal symbol certain change state, normal symbol short-time state, open extended state). Based on the general symbol hold storage data (numerical data indicating random 4 for determining the display result of the normal symbol) stored in the head order of the reservation storage unit, the normal symbol change display is made with reference to the normal symbol display result determination table. A determination is made as to whether the display result at is “win” or “out”.

  In the normal symbol display result determination table, in the high base state (ordinary symbol probability variation state), the rate at which the normal symbol display result is determined to be “hit” is higher than in the normal state. The decision value to be compared with random 4 is assigned. For example, in the normal state, the ratio that the display result of the normal symbol is “hit” is 2/11, whereas in the high base state, the determination that the display result of the normal symbol is “hit” is made. The ratio of being made is as high as 9/11. Thus, in the high base state, the normal symbol display process of S511 makes it easier to determine that the display result of the normal symbol is “winning” compared to the normal gaming state, so that the second start formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 15 The winning opening 13b is likely to be in an open state, and the game ball is likely to enter (start winning prize) into the second starting winning opening 13b.

  In the normal symbol determination process, the normal symbol variation time is also determined using the normal symbol display result determination table. In the normal symbol display result determination table, the normal symbol variation time is set to be shorter in the high base state (normal symbol short state) than in the normal state. Thus, in the high base state, in the normal symbol determination process of S511, when the high base flag is set, the high base state is recognized, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened compared to the normal state. The variation time is determined. For example, in the normal state, the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, whereas the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the high base state is 0.2 seconds. In the high base state, the interval at which the variation display result of the normal symbol is derived and displayed is shortened, so that the interval at which the variation display result of “winning” is derived and displayed is also shortened. The start winning opening 13b is likely to be in an open state, and the game ball is likely to enter (start winning prize) into the second start winning opening 13b.

  Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 (second start winning port 13b) are also determined using the normal symbol display result determination table. However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the number of times of opening is one in both the normal state and the high base state. In the normal symbol display result determination table, when the high base flag is set, the high base state (open extended state) is recognized, and the variable winning ball device 15 (second start winning prize) is more than in the normal state. The opening time of the mouth 13b) is set to be long. Therefore, in the high base state, control is performed such that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (second start winning port 13b) is longer than that in the normal gaming state. As a result, in the high base state, the opening time becomes longer, thereby increasing the time for the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning port 13b) to be in the opened state, and the game ball enters the second starting winning port 13b. (Starting prize) will be easier.

  In the normal symbol determination process, after such various determinations are made, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “2”.

  The normal symbol variation process of S512 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the normal symbol variation display by the normal symbol display 10. The normal symbol that is variably displayed based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol stop symbol that is displayed as a normal symbol display result when the normal symbol stop processing of S513 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, an elapsed time after the normal symbol starts to be varied is measured. At this time, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the variation time determined in the normal symbol determination process. When the determined fluctuation time is reached, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process of S513 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display unit 10 is set to stop the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and to display the display result. The setting for deriving and displaying the display result of the normal symbol is set to “3” for the value of the normal symbol process flag when the measured elapsed time reaches the determined variation time in the normal symbol variation process of S512. It may be performed before the update. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the display result of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process is “winning”, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set with the opening time and the number of releases determined in the normal symbol determination process. After the operation pattern for driving the solenoid 16 to open and close is set, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the display result of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process is “out of”, the normal symbol process flag is cleared and the value is updated to “0”. In this embodiment, since 0.5 seconds is set as the normal symbol fluctuation stop time (symbol fixed stop time), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and then 0. It is preferable to update the value of the normal symbol process flag to “4” or “0” after confirming that 5 seconds have passed.

  The normal electric accessory actuating process of S514 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, in response to the display result in the normal symbol variation display being “winning”, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is operated to open the second position by operating the movable piece in the open state. Control for changing the winning opening 13b from the closed state to the open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is generated by generating a drive control signal for driving the solenoid 16 according to the setting of the actuating pattern set in the ordinary symbol stopping process of S513. Then, control is performed to make the open state based on the release time and the number of releases determined in the normal symbol determination process. Thereby, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened and closed with an operation pattern according to the gaming state and the display result. When the drive of the solenoid 16 according to the setting of the operation pattern is completed, the normal symbol process flag is cleared and the value is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol changing process is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.1 second, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is updated every time 0.1 second elapses. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  Here, the special symbol display control data set or updated in step S3202 includes data for designating which LED 403 corresponding to the first symbol or LED 405 corresponding to the second symbol is to be controlled, and the designation And data for designating whether the turned-on LED is in a lit state or an unlit state. In the present embodiment, the LED 403 is blinking during variable display of the first symbol, and the LED 405 is blinking during variable display of the second symbol, but the lighting state based on the set and updated special symbol display control data and By repeating the turn-off state, this blinking state is realized. In the present embodiment, the special symbol display control data designating that the lighting control of the LED 403 corresponding to the first symbol is controlled also designates that the 7-segment LED 404 corresponding to the first symbol is turned off. It is assumed that the special symbol display control data designating that the LED 405 corresponding to the second symbol is controlled to turn off the 7-segment LED 406 corresponding to the second symbol.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  Here, the special symbol display control data set in step S3204 includes data designating which lighting control of the 7-segment LED 404 corresponding to the first symbol or the 7-segment LED 406 corresponding to the second symbol is to be performed, Data specifying which of the segments (LEDs) constituting the specified 7-segment LED is to be lit is included. In this embodiment, during the symbol fixed stop time of the first symbol, a predetermined segment of the segments constituting the 7-segment LED 404 is lit, and during the symbol fixed stop time of the second symbol, the segment configuring the 7-segment LED 406 Among these, a predetermined segment is in a lighting state, and this lighting state is realized based on the set special symbol display control data. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data designating that the 7-segment LED 404 corresponding to the first symbol is to be turned on also specifies that the LED 403 corresponding to the first symbol is to be turned off. It is assumed that the special symbol display control data designating that the 7-segment LED 406 corresponding to the second symbol is to be turned on also designates that the LED 405 corresponding to the second symbol is turned off.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the normal symbol display control process (step S33) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the normal symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 2 (step S3206). If the value of the normal symbol process flag is 2 (that is, if the normal symbol variation process is being executed), the CPU 56 outputs the normal symbol display control data for normal symbol variation display for setting the normal symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the buffer is performed (step S3207). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates normal symbol display control data for performing variable symbol display. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.1 second, the value of the normal symbol display control data set in the output buffer is updated every time 0.1 second elapses. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a normal signal is output to the normal symbol display 10 in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for normal symbol display control data setting. Normal symbol variation display on the display 10 is executed.

  Here, the normal symbol display control data set or updated in step S3207 includes data designating whether the LED 401 serving as the first display unit is in the lit state or the unlit state. In the present embodiment, the LED 401 is in a blinking state during normal symbol variable display, but this blinking state is realized by repeating the lighting state and the extinguishing state based on the set and updated normal symbol display control data. It will be. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display control data for designating whether the LED 401 as the first display unit is in the lit state or the unlit state sets the LED 402 as the second display unit in the unlit state. Is also specified.

  If the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 2, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (step S3208). If the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (that is, when shifting to the normal symbol stop process), the CPU 56 stops the normal symbol set in the normal symbol determination process. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data is performed (step S3209). In this case, the CPU 56 sets normal symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a normal signal is output to the normal symbol display 10 in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for normal symbol display control data setting. The stop symbol of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the display 10. Since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3209 is executed and the normal symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest normal symbol display control data is displayed in the display control processing of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started.

  Here, the normal symbol display control data set in step S3209 includes data designating whether the LED 401 serving as the first display unit is to be turned on or off. In the present embodiment, the LED 402 is lit (when hit) or turned off (when disconnected) during the symbol fixed stop time of the normal symbol, but this lighting state is based on the set normal symbol display control data. Or a light extinction state is implement | achieved. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display control data designating that the lighting control of the LED 402 serving as the second display unit is to be performed also designates that the LED 401 serving as the first display unit is turned off. To do.

  In this embodiment, the normal symbol display control data is set in the output buffer in accordance with the value of the normal symbol process flag. However, in the normal symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of normal symbol fluctuation. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the normal symbol fluctuation. In the normal symbol display control process (step S33), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the normal symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Ordinary symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stopped symbol may be set.

[Information output signal]
Next, an information output signal output from the information output circuit 64 will be described with reference to FIG. During the big hit gaming state related to the big hit A and big hit B, the CPU 56 outputs a single big hit signal from the information output circuit 64 (sets to the ON state). For example, during the period from the transmission of the jackpot start designation command (step S133) to the transmission of the jackpot end designation command (step S162), the jackpot 1 signal may be turned on. In the example of FIG. 39, one jackpot signal is in the ON state during the periods (1) to (2) and (4) to (5). In an external device such as a hall computer or a call lamp device to which a jackpot signal is input, the number of jackpot occurrences in the gaming machine is calculated based on the number of times the jackpot signal is turned on (the number of times of switching from OFF to ON). Can be counted.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the probability variation attacker 20B during the big hit gaming state, the high probability / high base state is controlled after the big hit gaming state ends. In the example of FIG. 39, the period of (2) to (3) after the end of the jackpot gaming state related to the jackpot A and the period of (5) to (6) after the end of the jackpot gaming state related to the jackpot B are high probability. / Controlled to a high base state. In this example, an example is shown in which a game ball is won in the probability variation attacker 20B during the big hit gaming state related to the big hit B.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the end of the high probability / high base state is set in the variation pattern setting process before the variation in which the variable display result is a big hit and the variation in which the probability variation falls in the probability variation falling lottery starts ( In step S107E), these fluctuations are not controlled to the high probability / high base state during the fluctuation period. In the example of FIG. 39, the period of (3) to (4), which is a symbol variation period with a big hit, and the period of (6) to (7), which is a symbol variation period with a probable fall, are high probability / high. Not controlled to base state.

  Therefore, even if a high probability signal indicating that the CPU 56 is in the high probability state is output from the information output circuit 64 during the high probability state period, the signal is not output before the big hit gaming state occurs. Therefore, it is not possible to take the method of [determining that when one big hit signal is ON during high probability signal input and counting the number of consecutive chunks] in an external device. Note that the continuous chain here means “a big hit is generated by the jackpot determination executed in a high probability state (step S61)”, and the consecutive number of chunks means “a jackpot determination executed in a high probability state ( The number of consecutive big hits generated in step S61) is “+1”, which is different from the value based on the continuous channel counter (the number of continuous channels on production) counted by the production control microcomputer 100 described later.

  On the other hand, the period (3) to (4), which is a symbol variation period with a big hit, is made to continuously output a high probability signal, and is a symbol variation period (6) to (7) with a probability change fall. If the high probability signal is not output during the period, the display of an external device such as a ringing lamp will let the player know whether a big hit will occur during the fluctuation period or the probability will fall, reducing interest Problem arises. Specifically, when the call lamp device displays “probably changing” during a period when a high probability signal is being input to the call lamp device, “probably changing” is displayed during the changing period of the production symbol. If it is not done, it will be recognized as a probable fall, and the player will be discouraged before the production symbol stops.

  In this embodiment, in order to solve such a problem, two jackpot signals shown in FIG. 39 are output. The CPU 56 (1) during the jackpot gaming state related to the jackpot A and jackpot B, (2) during the high probability state, (3) during the jackpot variation that occurred in the high probability state, and (4) during the variation that will be a probable fall Outputs two jackpot signals from the information output circuit 64 (turns on). That is, for the two jackpot signals, (1) during one jackpot signal output, (2) the period when the high probability flag is set, (3) the jackpot flag is set while the high probability flag is set (step S71) The period from the start of change of the special symbol when it is set to the stop of change, and (4) the period from the start of change to the stop of change of the special symbol when the probability change fall flag is set (step S208) (ON state) Becomes).

  By outputting two jackpot signals in this way, in an external device such as a hall computer or a call lamp device, when one jackpot signal is input during the period when the two jackpot signals are being input, it is assumed that a continuous change occurs. You can recognize and count the number of consecutive chunks. It should be noted that the consecutive chunk is “a big hit is generated by the big hit determination executed in the high base state (step S61)”, and the consecutive chunk number is generated by the “big hit determination executed in the high base state (step S61)”. Even if it is defined that the number of consecutive big hits is “+1”, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of consecutive chunks and count the number of consecutive chunks by the same method.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the big hit gaming state related to the big hit B occurs, the CPU 56 outputs three jackpot signals from the information output circuit 64 during the big hit gaming state (set to the ON state). Thus, in the external device, if a big hit 1 signal is input and a big hit 3 signal is not inputted, a big hit A is generated, and if a big hit 1 signal is input and a big hit 3 signal is input, a big hit B is generated. And the number of occurrences of jackpot A and the number of occurrences of jackpot B can be counted individually.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 outputs a big hit 4 signal from the information output circuit 64 when the big hit gaming state related to the big hit B occurs and when the game ball wins the probability variation attacker 20B during the big hit gaming state. (Turns on) In the external device, by counting the number of outputs of the big hit 4 signals, it is possible to count the number of times that the game ball has won the probability variation attacker 20B in the big hit B that is short-circuited. For example, if the number of wins to the probability variation attacker 20B is large (for example, 7 times) with respect to the number of occurrences of the jackpot B that is short-circuited (10 times), the game hall manager grasps the possibility of fraud. can do.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, a process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9a, 9b, At 9c and 9d, display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 18 and 19) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  42 to 45 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 3 specifying command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622). Further, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the high probability state background continuation counter is 1 or more (step S622A). If the value of the high-probability state background continuation counter is 1 or more (Y in step S622A), 1 is added to the value of the continuous channel counter (step S622B).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (command A301 (H)) (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S642), and in step S8016B described later. The set prefetch notice prohibition flag is reset (step S643), and the process ends. That is, based on the fact that it is determined that the subsequent gaming state is controlled to the normal state or the probability variation state by the end of the big hit gaming state, the prefetching notice prohibition flag is reset, and the restriction of the prefetching notice effect is released, It is possible to execute a prefetch notice effect.

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designating command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received symbol designating command as the first free winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S652).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. As shown in FIG. 46, an area (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number is secured in the start winning command storage area. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218 to S1221 and S1229 to S1232 of the start port switch passing process in FIG. In addition, four commands of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start prize designation command (a first start prize designation command or a second start prize designation command), and a combined pending storage number designation command are set in one timer interrupt. Sent by. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other. Thus, a storage area is secured.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores commands in the first storage area that is vacant in the start winning command storage area in the order received. In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning designation command, and the total pending storage number designation command within one timer interruption. As shown in FIG. 46, each of the storage areas 1 to 8 is stored in the order of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command (in FIG. 46, An example in which commands are stored in the storage areas 1 to 5 is shown).

  In the example shown in FIG. 46, a total pending storage number designation command (7) that designates the total pending storage number 7 in the storage area in which up to seven pending memories have occurred in the previous fluctuation display and the latest command is stored. C207 (H)) is stored, and thereafter, the storage state of the command storage area at the time of the start winning prize is shown in the situation where one hold memory is consumed and the variable display based on the second hold memory is started. .

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 46 is the effect of the effect symbol variation start process described later at the timing of starting the effect symbol variation display every time the effect symbol variation display is started. In step S8022, the contents stored in the first storage area 1 are deleted and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 46, when a new effect symbol variation display is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2 and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3 and stored in the storage area 5. Each command is shifted to the storage area 4.

  In addition, in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 46, the storage area 2 shows an example in which the command reception cannot be normally performed and the total pending storage number designation command is missed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 46, in the storage area 2 of the start winning command storage area, the content of the fourth storage area in which the total pending storage number designation command is originally stored is “0000 (H)”. The remaining state is shown.

  Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, a command at the time of start winning (design designation command, variable category command, start winning designation command and total pending storage number stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. Based on the designation command), the prefetching notice effect is set in the prefetching notice effect determination process (see step S800A). The command at the time of starting winning (design designation command, variation category command, starting prize designation command and summation) is set. When a missed or inconsistent stored memory number designation command) occurs, the setting of the pre-reading notice effect is limited until the change display of the reserved memory corresponding to the command at the start winning prize is exhausted. In this embodiment, the command received at the start winning prize stored in the start winning command storage area is received during a period during which the setting of the prefetching notice effect is restricted (hereinafter also referred to as the prefetching notice setting restriction period). As shown in FIG. 46, for the case where the setting process of the pre-reading notice effect is not performed at the timing of receiving the command at the start winning prize, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect setting process is not performed. Information is set. In the example shown in FIG. 46, for the storage areas 2 to 5 after the storage area 2 where the total pending storage number designation command has been missed, the value of the undetermined information indicates that the pre-reading notice effect setting process has not been performed. 1 ”is set.

  In this embodiment, “restrict the execution of the pre-reading notice effect” means that the pre-reading notice effect is not set at all for the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred within the pre-reading notice setting restriction period. It includes both the concept of not executing the pre-reading notice effect and the concept of not setting and executing the pre-reading notice effect of some aspects. In this embodiment, as will be described later, an effect mode of “countdown” that can be executed only in the case of “super reach big hit” with respect to the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred within the pre-reading notice setting restriction period. The pre-reading notice effect is not set and executed, and the pre-reading notice setting is applied to the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation of changes during symbol change” and “mode transition” that can be executed even when “non-reach” It can be set and executed even within the time limit.

  In this embodiment, when a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a startup prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command received when a starting prize is generated are comprehensively expressed, Say. Further, among the commands at the time of starting winning, a starting winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command which are commands for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased, When expressed in a comprehensive manner, it is also called reserved storage information. Also, a symbol designation command and a variation category command which are commands indicating whether or not the big hit is determined in the winning effect processing at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 27), the determination result of the big hit type, and the determination result of the variation pattern type Is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  Returning to FIG. 44, if the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored (step S654). However, if the variation category command, start winning designation command, or total pending storage number designation command is already stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command is stored, the variation category command will be included in the current timer interrupt. This means that the symbol designating command to be received has been missed. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. The production control microcomputer 100 stores the variation category command in step S654, and then the stored variation category command is a command indicating “high probability at start winning / high base state big hit” or “start winning prize”. Judge whether it is one of the commands indicating “Sometimes it is high probability / deviation in high base state and there is a certain fall”, and if it is one of them, a special production sound is output with a predetermined probability The output may be performed by the substrate 70.

  If the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received first start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designating command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step S656). However, if the start winning designation command or the combined pending storage number designation command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command or variation category command is stored, the first start within the current timer interrupt This means that both the symbol designation command and the variable category command to be received prior to the winning designation command have been missed. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first start winning designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received second start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designating command and variation category command are stored in the storage area (step S658). However, if the start winning designation command or the total pending storage number designation command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command or variable category command is stored, the second start within the current timer interrupt This means that both the symbol designation command and the variable category command to be received prior to the winning designation command have been missed. In that case, the CPU 101 for effect control stores the received second start winning designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received production control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S659), the production control CPU 101 uses the received aggregate pending storage number designation command for each start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, and start winning designation command are stored in the storage area (step S660). However, if the total pending storage number designation command is already stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, start winning designation command is stored, the total pending memory is stored within the current timer interrupt. This means that all of the symbol designation command, variable category command, and start winning designation command to be received prior to the number designation command have been missed. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received total pending storage number designation command in the first free storage area in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 erases the first on-hold display in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c and sets the remaining on-hold display to 1. Shifting is performed one by one, and the total pending storage number display in the total pending storage display portion 18c is updated (step S662A). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays on the combined hold storage display unit 18c are lit up, the first hold display is deleted when the combined hold storage number subtraction designation command is received. At the same time, the second hold display is shifted to the first display area, the third hold display is shifted to the second display area, and the fourth display is displayed. The held display that has been displayed is shifted to the third display area, and the held display that has been displayed fifth is shifted to the fourth display area.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 holds the target of the notice of the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “change in holding ball” described later (that is, the first special display or the second special display described later). If the display is erased), the pre-reading notice execution flag corresponding to the set “change in holding ball” is reset (step S662B).

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the normal state background continuation counter (step S666A) and updates the updated normal state background continuation counter. It is determined whether the value of is greater than a predetermined number of times (step S666B). When the value of the normal state background continuation counter is equal to or smaller than the predetermined number in step S666B (N in step S666B), the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is the background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, FIG. ) Background screen) (step S667). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a high probability state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high base state ( Step S668).

  When the value of the normal state background continuation counter is larger than the predetermined number in step S666B (Y in step S666B), the effect control CPU 101 resets the high probability state background continuation counter (step S666C) and resets the continuous counter. (Step S666D), and the process of Step S667 is executed.

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / high base state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the high probability state background continuation counter (step S670A), and the normal state. The background continuation counter is reset (step S670B), and the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is set as a background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state (for example, the background screen of FIG. 76B) (step S667). ). In addition, the production control CPU 101 sets a high probability state flag and a high base state flag (step S671).

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), during the period in which the effect control CPU 101 receives the normal state background designation command, a mountain 1001 and the sun 1002 serve as background screens according to the normal state. Displays a background image containing Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the CPU 101 for effect control uses the UFO (in this example) as a background screen corresponding to the high probability state during the period when the high probability / high base state background designation command is received. An image including a small UFO 1003) is displayed.

  The value of the high probability state background continuation counter is incremented by 1 each time a high probability / high base state background designation command is transmitted before the variable display in the high probability state is started, and the gaming state is in the normal state. Then, after a predetermined number of variable displays, it is reset. Depending on the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the value of the high probability state background continuation counter is not reset and is updated cumulatively. In this embodiment, the trigger for the game state to be in the normal state is that either the probability change falling lottery is determined to be a probability change fall or the game ball does not win the probability change attacker 20B during the big hit game state. Therefore, as long as these events do not occur, the value of the high probability state background continuation counter is added and updated without being reset. In the present embodiment, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is made different according to the high probability state background continuation counter value.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing the production contents of the background screen according to the high probability state background continuation counter value. In the period where the high probability state background continuation counter value is 1 to 100, as shown in FIG. 76B, one small UFO 1003 is displayed, and at this time, the color of the background screen is blue. As the high-probability state background continuation counter value increases from 101 to 200, 201 to 300,..., 501 to 600, the small UFO 1003 increases to 2, 3,. The color of the background screen is blue when the high probability state background continuation counter value is 1 to 300, and is green during the period 301 to 600.

  As described above, since the effect mode of the background screen is changed according to the period during which the high probability state continues, the interest of the game in the high probability state can be improved. For example, even when a big hit is not likely to occur in a high probability state (so-called probabilistic change climax occurs), the interest in the change of the background screen due to the continued high probability state is raised, and the player is not bored. ing. In the present embodiment, the number of small UFOs 1003 is initially increased every 100 fluctuations, and the background color is initially changed every 300 fluctuations. In this way, the player is not bored by changing the change cycle for two different elements (the number of characters and the background color).

  As shown in FIG. 47, one medium-sized UFO (medium-sized UFO 1004 shown in FIG. 79A) is displayed in the period where the high probability state background continuation counter value is 601 to 800. At this time, the background screen color is yellow. is there. As the high-probability state background continuation counter value increases to 801 to 1000 and 1001 to 1200, the medium-sized UFO 1004 increases to two and three. Further, the color of the background screen remains yellow while the high probability state background continuation counter value is 601 to 1200. When the high probability state background continuation counter value is 1201 or more, one large UFO is displayed, and the background screen color is red. Thus, the change in the size and number of UFOs changes every 200 in the period where the high probability state background continuation counter value is 601 to 1200, and the color of the background screen does not change during this period. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the high probability state background continuation counter value exceeds 601, the frequency of changing the background screen is reduced, and thus the period of the background image change is set to the high probability state background continuation counter. Unexpectedness can be given to the player by changing the value according to the value.

  In this embodiment, as shown in step S666B, during the period when the normal state background continuation counter value is equal to or less than the predetermined number (N), the high probability state background continuation counter is not reset and the continuous channel counter is not reset. By doing in this way, when the game ball is won again in the probability variation attacker 20B within a predetermined number of times after the probability variation falls, and the gaming state becomes the high probability / high base state, the high probability state background Counting is restarted from a state in which the continuation counter and the continuous channel counter are not reset. That is, the background screen before the probability change falls is displayed again, and the number of consecutive chunks is counted assuming that the consecutive chunks continue.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), when the high probability state background continuation counter value is 700, one medium-sized UFO 1004 is displayed on the background screen, and the background screen color is green. To do. Then, when it is determined that there is a probability change fall by the probability change fall lottery associated with the change, a high probability / high base state end setting is performed, and a normal state background designation command is transmitted from the next change. As a result, a background screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed as shown in FIG. Here, when the value of the normal state background continuation counter is equal to or less than the predetermined number in step S666B (N in step S666B), the effect control CPU 101 does not reset the high probability state background continuation counter. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), when a big hit occurs within a predetermined number of fluctuations after falling to the normal state and the high probability / high base state is reached again, the high probability state background continuation counter that has not been reset. Will be inherited. As a result, as shown in FIG. 79 (d), the background screen is determined based on a value (701 here) obtained by adding 1 to the high probability state background continuation counter value (700 here) at the time of the probability fall. . In this example, one medium-sized UFO 1004 is displayed on the background screen, and the background screen color is green.

  Here, the end of the high probability / high base state tends to be an opportunity for the player to end the game. Even if it falls from the high probability state as in this embodiment, if the big hit occurs within the predetermined number of fluctuations and enters the high probability state again, the content of the effect before the fall is taken over By doing so, it will increase the willingness to continue the game. Here, the predetermined number of times compared with the value of the normal state background continuation counter in step S666B is, for example, 100 when the value of the continuous channel counter is 2 or less (that is, 3 or less), and the value of the continuous channel counter is 3 If it is more than that (that is, more than 4 consecutive channels), a large value may be set when falling from the probability change state with a small number of consecutive channels, such as 30, or vice versa. A large value may be set when it is achieved. The predetermined number of times may be a fixed value (for example, 50) regardless of the value of the continuous counter.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the value of the normal state background continuation counter is equal to or less than the predetermined number (N in step S666B), the continuous channel counter is not reset. Usually, when the gaming state falls from the high probability / high base state to the normal state, the number of consecutive chunks is reset there and the continuous chunk is interrupted. For example, even if a big hit occurs immediately after the gaming state becomes the normal state, the number of consecutive chunks in this case is recounted from 1. On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the gaming state becomes the normal state, if a big hit occurs within a predetermined number of fluctuations after the fall, the big hit is added to the continuous channel counter value before the fall. The value obtained by the addition (in step S622B) is used as the continuous channel counter value. In this way, the player's willingness to continue the game is enhanced by allowing the continuous number of times to be inherited. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, during the big hit gaming state (during round), the consecutive number of times 1400 is displayed at the top of the screen. In this example, when the consecutive Chan counter value is 4, 5 wins are displayed.

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S678), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S679). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening open designation command received in the special winning opening open designated command storage area formed in the RAM (step S680). The production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the number of rounds during the big hit game by confirming the special winning opening open designated command stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area. Can do.

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big winning opening (step S681), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big winning opening (step S682). Also, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening after opening designation command in the designated winning opening after opening special command opening storage area formed in the RAM (step S683).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S684). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a prefetch notice effect determination process for determining presence or absence of a prefetch notice effect and an effect mode (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  49 to 52 are flowcharts showing the prefetch notice effect determination process (step S800A). In the pre-reading notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not at least one of the commands at the time of start winning is newly received (step S6001). Specifically, whether or not at least one of the symbol designating command, the variable category command, the starting winning designating command, or the total pending storage number designating command is newly stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. Can be confirmed. If no command is newly received, the process is terminated.

  If at least one of the commands at the time of the start winning prize has been newly received, the effect control CPU 101 has set one of the prefetching notice execution flags indicating that the prefetching notice effect is already being executed. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S6002). Note that the pre-reading notice execution flag is set in steps S6013, S6029, and S8012, which will be described later. If any pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6020.

  Note that, by executing the process of step S6002, in this embodiment, the determination process of the prefetching notice effect is executed on the condition that the prefetching notice effect is not being executed. Since the pre-reading notice execution flag is already set after starting the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the already determined effect form without executing the pre-reading notice effect determination process again. The In addition, if a pre-learning pre-announcement effect is performed when a pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of a “non-reach” prize, the super-reach is switched from the pre-reading notice effect that is being executed. Or a jackpot effect (for example, a reach notice or a jackpot notice) may be executed. Note that the pre-reading notice execution flag presence / absence determination process in step S6002 may not be provided, and the processes after step S6003 may be executed regardless of whether the pre-reading notice effect is being executed.

  If no pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a pre-reading notice setting restriction flag indicating that the prefetch notice setting restriction period is set (step S6003). If the prefetch notice setting restriction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6020. In other words, during the prefetching notice setting restriction period, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted so as not to proceed to the processing for setting the prefetching notice effect in steps S6004 to S6018.

  If the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the latest start winning command stored in the start winning command storage area, and the commands at the start winning prize are in order. It is confirmed whether or not all have been received (step S6004).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, four commands of a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a starting winning designating command, and a combined reserved memory number designating command are grouped in one timer interrupt as commands at the time of starting winning a prize. Therefore, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) in the start winning command storage area. , And a command “C2 (H)” should be stored (see FIG. 19). Therefore, if any of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 can determine that the command has been missed due to noise or garbled data of the MODE data and the command could not be received correctly. .

  In this embodiment, since the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start prize designation command, and the combined pending storage number designation command should be received in this order, the MODE data is “ It should be stored in the order of “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”), and “C2 (H)”. Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, the effect control CPU 101 may store “C6 (H)” before “C4 (H)” if the order is different. It can be determined that the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  When it is determined that the received start winning command is not in order or part of the command is missing, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6023. When it is determined that all the commands at the time of the start winning prize have been received in order, the effect control CPU 101 matches the contents of the latest symbol designation command stored in the start winning prize command storage area and the variable category command. It is confirmed whether or not (step S6005). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a deviation is stored as the symbol designation command, the variation category 1 command to the variation category 11 command corresponding to the deviation as the variation category command are stored. One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 20 and 21). Nevertheless, when the variation category 21 command to variation category 32 command (see FIG. 22) corresponding to the jackpot is stored, the effect control CPU 101 matches the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command. It can be judged that there is a contradiction.

  When it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are not consistent, the CPU for effect control 101 proceeds to step S6023. When it is determined that the contents of the symbol designating command and the variation category command are consistent, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the latest start winning designation command stored in the start winning command storage area and the combined pending storage number It is confirmed whether or not the content of the specified command is consistent (step S6006). Specifically, a first start winning designation command for designating that there has been a start winning at the first start winning opening 13a, or a second start winning design for designating that there has been a start winning at the second start winning opening 13b. Even if the specified command is stored, if the total pending storage number indicated by the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning command storage area is 0, the effect control The CPU 101 can determine that the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command are not consistent and inconsistent.

  In this embodiment, when any one of the determination processes in steps S6004 to S6006 is determined to be N, the process proceeds to step S6023 to shift to the pre-reading notice effect setting limit period. However, this is not the only case. For example, on the condition that any two of the determination processes in steps S6004 to S6006 are determined to be N, the process may proceed to step S6023 to shift to the prefetching notice effect setting limit period. On the condition that it is determined as N in all the determination processes of S6006, the process may proceed to step S6023 to shift to the prefetching notice effect setting limit period.

  Further, it is not always necessary to provide all three determination processes in steps S6004 to S6006 in the program, and the program may be configured to provide only one determination process in steps S6004 to S6006. However, the program may be configured to provide only any two of the determination processes in steps S6004 to S6006.

  If it is determined that the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command are not consistent, the CPU 101 for effect control proceeds to step S6023. When it is determined that the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command match, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all the variation category commands stored in the start winning command storage area. Based on each of the extracted variation category commands, all of the variation category commands stored as the determination result at the time of winning for the previous start winning prize are all “non-reach out” (command C600 (H) non-reach CA2-1 designation or It is confirmed whether or not the command C608 is ultrashort CA2-9 designation (step S6007). If all are “non-reach”, the process proceeds to step S6008. If even one variable category command other than “non-reach” is included, the process proceeds to step S6020 without executing the processes in steps S6008 to S6018.

  By executing the processing of step S6007, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is provided on the condition that all the fluctuation displays until the notice of the fluctuation display to be noticed are all “non-reach”. Configured to be executable. Such a configuration prevents a situation in which the continuity of the pre-reading notice effect is impaired due to the reach effect interrupting in the middle of the pre-reading notice effect. This also applies to the processing in steps S6024 and S8007 described later. However, among the pre-reading notice effects, the pre-reading notice effect of the “reserved ball change” effect mode, which will be described later, does not cause much problem of the continuity of the effects. Only when it is executed, the process of step S6007 is executed so that the pre-reading notice effect can be executed on the condition that all of the fluctuation displays until the notice of fluctuation display starts is “non-reach”. May be. It should be noted that a determination process is not provided for determining whether or not all the variation displays up to the advance notice target in step S6007 are the change category 1, and whether or not all the change displays up to the advance notice target are “non-reach”. Instead, the processing after step S6008 may be executed.

  If all are “non-reach” in step S6007, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S6008). If the high probability state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the prefetching notice allocation table A as a table for determining the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the effect mode of the prefetching notice effect (step S6009). If the high probability state flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control selects the prefetch notice allocation table B (step S6010).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a prefetching notice effect mode determining random number for determining the effect type of the prefetching notice effect, and extracts the value of the extracted prefetching notice effect mode determination random number based on the received variation category command. Is determined as to which of the judgment values included in the prefetching notice allocation table selected in steps S6009 and S6010 matches the prefetching notice effect and the manner of production (step S6011).

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a prefetching notice allocation table showing the distribution of prefetching notice effects. If the current gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 101 for effect control is indicated by the received variable category command using the prefetching notice allocation table A in the normal state shown in FIG. 53A selected in step S6009. Based on the winning pattern determination result of the variation pattern type, an effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table A, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a non-reach CA2-1 change pattern type with a change category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). 53 (A) in the case where a winning determination result indicating that “non-reach is not included” is indicated (specifically, when command C600 (H) is received). As shown in FIG. 4, it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect in any of the effect modes of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change”, “mode transition”, or “change in reserved ball”. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is the super CA2-7 variation pattern type (that is, “super-reaching is lost”) (specifically). Specifically, when the command C607 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 53 (A), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode shift” or “change in reserved ball” It is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect of any of the effect modes. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 (that is, “super reach jackpot”) (specifically). Specifically, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 53 (A), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode shift” , It is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of either “countdown” or “reserved ball change”.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, a variation category command indicating that it is a big hit due to a super shortening variation and a variation category command indicating that a super shortening variation is lost are not transmitted. “Shooting”, which is a pre-reading notice effect for the variable category command, is not executed. The pre-reading notice effect of the “shooting” effect mode is executed only when the gaming state is in the high base state, and is not executed when in the normal state. Note that the specific contents of the presentation modes of each pre-reading notice effect of “change in change mode at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, “countdown”, “change in reserved ball”, and “shooting” will be described later.

  If the current gaming state is the high probability / high base state, the CPU 101 for effect control receives the pre-reading notice allocation table B in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 53 (B) selected in step S6010. Based on the winning pattern determination result of the variation pattern type indicated by the variation category command, the effect mode of the prefetch notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice allocation table B is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a variation pattern type of the super shortened CA2-9 by a variation category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). If there is a winning determination result indicating “non-reach out” and no change in super shortened variation), as shown in FIG. 53 (B), “shooting” There is a case where a pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the production control CPU 101 has three variable category commands that are stored as determination results at the time of winning the previous winning prize, all of which are designated as super shortened CA2-9 (specifically, C608). (H) is received), and the variable category command that is the target of the prefetch notice received this time (the variable category corresponding to the fourth reserved memory when the total number of reserved memories is 4) Command) may also execute a pre-reading notice effect of the “shooting” effect mode on condition that the super short CA2-9 is designated. That is, when all the variation category commands stored in the storage areas 1 to 4 of the start winning command storage area are C608 (H) and the four consecutive super shortening fluctuations are out of the four consecutive super shortening fluctuations, There is a case in which a pre-reading notice effect of the “shooting” effect mode is executed as a so-called gasse effect that makes the player expect that the second will be a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the prefetch notice allocation table B is used, and the variation category command is a variation pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 (that is, reach is not accompanied by a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). In the case where a winning determination result indicating that “non-reach out, but not a very short fluctuation” is shown (specifically, when command C600 (H) is received), As shown in 53 (B), there is no allocation for the pre-reading notice effect of any production mode, and it is decided not to execute the prefetching notice.

  In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is the super CA2-7 variation pattern type (that is, “super-reaching is lost”) (specifically). Specifically, when command C609 (H) or command C60B (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 53 (B), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “change in reserved ball” It is determined that the pre-reading notice effect of any one of the effect modes is executed. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 (that is, “super reach jackpot”) (specifically). Specifically, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 53 (B), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “countdown” or It is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect of any effect mode of “reserved ball change”.

  In the present embodiment, the production control CPU 101 has three variable category commands that are stored as determination results at the time of winning the previous winning prize, all of which are designated as super shortened CA2-9 (specifically, C608). (H) is received), and the variable category command that is the target of the prefetch notice received this time (the variable category corresponding to the fourth reserved memory when the total number of reserved memories is 4) On the condition that the command) is super short CA3-6 designation (super short fluctuation big hit), the pre-reading notice effect of the “shooting” effect mode may be executed. That is, the variable category command stored in the storage areas 1 to 3 of the start winning command storage area is C608 (H), and the variable category command stored in the storage area 4 is C618 or C61B (H). In such a case, a pre-reading notice effect of the “shooting” effect mode may be executed as an effect that causes the player to expect that the fourth of the four consecutive ultrashort fluctuations will be a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, as a result of determining the winning pattern of the variation pattern type by the variation category command, “non-reach out”, “super reach out”, “super reach big hit” or “super shortened variation”. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed when any determination result of “big hit” is shown.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is selected only when the determination result at the time of winning is “super reach big hit” Is done. Therefore, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the “countdown” effect mode, it is determined that at least the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is a big hit, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In step S6011, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big hit game is being played, and if the big hit game is being played, it is desirable to determine not to forcibly perform the prefetching notice effect. Whether or not the big hit game is in progress, for example, confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value (specifically, 4 to 7) indicating the big hit display process to the big hit end effect process. It can be determined by doing. The same applies to steps S6027 and S8010 described later.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be executed even during the big hit game. For example, it is not the timing at which a start win occurs and the command at the time of the start win is received, but in a specific round (for example, 10 rounds) in the big hit game, the symbol designation command stored in the start win command storage area or the fluctuation The category command may be read to determine whether to execute the prefetching notice effect, and the prefetching notice effect may be executed in the specific round. In this case, as the pre-reading notice effect, instead of a continuous aspect effect, for example, a so-called one-notification notification effect may be executed to notify that the big hit is fixed in the variable display after the end of the big hit game. Only the pre-reading notice effect similar to “holding ball change” may be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 49, after step S6011, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not the prefetching notice mode determined in step S6011 is a prefetching notice of a change in the holding ball (step S6011A). If it is determined in this step S6011A that it is not a pre-reading advance notice of change of the holding ball (NO), the process proceeds to step S6012. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6011 that the preserving ball change is pre-reading notice (YES), the processing proceeds to step S6012 after executing the holding ball mode setting process shown in FIG. 50 (step S6011B).

  In the reserved ball mode setting process shown in FIG. 50, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the prefetch notice prohibition flag is set (step S6011C). If it is determined in step S6011C that the pre-reading notice prohibition flag is not set (NO), the effect control CPU 101 refers to the start winning command storage area, and stores the start-preservation-related hold memory (the pre-reading notice It is determined whether or not the jackpot-designated symbol designation command is stored in the reserved memory excluding the target reserved memory) (step S6011D). In addition, when executing the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “holding ball change”, if the process of step S6007 described above is executed, each change display until the start of the variable display to be noticed is started. Since all the variable displays are “non-reach”, NO is determined in step S6011D.

  If it is determined in step S6011D that it is not stored (N), the effect control CPU 101 refers to the start winning command storage area, and holds the start storage related to the start winning (holding storage subject to the pre-reading notice). It is determined whether or not a variation category command that is out-of-range and has a certain probability of falling is stored in the hold storage excluding (step S6011E). If it is determined in step S6011E that it is not stored (N), the shape of the hold storage and the lighting / flashing mode are determined by the prefetch notice execution possible table described below (step S6011F), and the process proceeds to step S6012.

  In addition, when the prefetch notice prohibition flag is set in step S6011C (Y in step S6011C), in the case where the symbol designation command designating the big hit is stored in step S6011D (Y in step S6011D), in step S6011E, there is a deviation and certain change. If a fall category command category is stored (Y in step S6011E), the shape of the hold memory and the lighting / flashing mode are determined in the prefetch notice prohibition table described below (step S6011G), and the process proceeds to step S6012. move on. That is, if a start winning is generated within the period from the start of variable display in which the display result is a big hit until the end of the big hit gaming state (determined as Y in step S6011C), a big win is given at the start winning. If there is another reserved memory (determined as Y in step S6011D), and there is another reserved memory that shifts at the time of start winning and is likely to fall down (determined as Y in step S6011E), pre-reading notice is prohibited. The table will be selected.

  Here, FIG. 74A is a distribution table of the shape of the hold memory in the pre-reading notice of the hold ball change, which is stored in the effect control microcomputer 100. In the pre-reading notice of the change in the reserved ball, the shape of the reserved memory displayed on the combined reserved memory display unit 18c of the effect display device 9 is changed from a normal round shape to a small star shape (low expectation) according to the big hit expectation level. The pre-reading notice is executed by changing to a large star shape (medium expectation), a small heart shape (high expectation degree), or a large heart shape (decision of big hit). The sorting table of FIG. 74 (a) includes a prefetch notice execution enable table and a prefetch notice prohibition table.

  In the step S6011F, according to the prefetching notice executable table of FIG. 74 (a), in the case of losing, a round shape with a probability of 75% (that is, no change = no prefetching notice), a small star shape with a probability of 13%, A large star shape with a probability of 7%, a small heart shape with a probability of 5% is selected, and in the case of a big hit, a round shape with 45% probability (ie no change = no pre-reading notice), a small probability of 10% A star shape, a 20% probability large star shape, a 20% probability small heart shape, and a 5% probability large heart shape are selected. In other words, in the case of loss, a round shape without pre-reading notice is selected with high probability, and a heart shape with a large jackpot decision is not selected. In the case of a big hit, a small star shape, a large star shape, a small heart shape, or a large heart shape with a prefetch notice is selected, while a round shape without a prefetch notice is also selected.

  In step S6011G, according to the prefetching notice prohibition table in FIG. 74A, a round shape (that is, no change = no prefetching notice) is selected with a probability of 100% in both cases of loss and big hit. That is, in the case of a loss or a big hit, the execution of the prefetching notice is restricted (prohibited here) by not selecting the small star shape, the large star shape, the small heart shape, and the large heart shape with the prefetching notice.

  FIG. 75 is a distribution table of the turn-on / flashing mode of the hold memory in the pre-reading notice of the hold ball change stored in the production control microcomputer 100. In the pre-reading notice of the change in the holding ball, the shape of the holding memory displayed on the total holding memory display unit 18c of the effect display device 9 is changed to a normal lighting mode (low expectation) according to the expectation that the big hit is the big hit A. The pre-reading notice is executed by changing to a slow flashing mode (medium expectation) or a fast flashing mode (high expectation). The distribution table of FIG. 75 includes a prefetch notice execution enable table and a prefetch notice prohibition table.

  In step S6011F, according to the look-ahead notice executable table of FIG. 75, in the case of big hit A, lighting is performed with a probability of 5% (that is, no change = no look-ahead notice), blinking slowly with a probability of 20%, probability of 75% In the case of big hit B, lighting is performed with a probability of 75% (that is, no change = no pre-reading notice), slow blinking with a probability of 20%, and fast blinking with a probability of 5%. That is, in the case of big hit A, fast flashing is selected with high probability, and in the case of big hit B, lighting without pre-reading notice is selected with high probability.

  In step S6011G, according to the look-ahead notice prohibition table in FIG. 75, lighting is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, no change = no look-ahead notice) in both cases of big hit A and big hit B. In other words, in the case of big hit A or big hit B, execution of the prefetch notice is restricted (inhibited here) by not selecting slow blinking and fast blinking with prefetch notice.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 84, during normal time fluctuation fluctuation, the reserved storage X that becomes a big hit at the normal time (for example, random R described later is 1020, the normal big hit judgment shown in FIG. 13A). (A) at the time when there is a hold memory Y that is shifted in the normal time (a), there is a start win, and if the hold memory Z based on the start win is a normal time, it becomes a big hit (for example, random to be described later) When R is 1021 and matches the normal jackpot determination value shown in FIG. 13A), a jackpot prefetch notice (for example, the shape of the hold memory Z is changed to a heart shape) is executed for the hold memory Y. (B) After the loss fluctuation is stopped, a fluctuation based on the hold memory X is performed to make a big hit, and when the probability variation attacker is won during the big win (c), the hold memory Y executed after the big hit ends is stored. (D), but the stored storage Z does not become a big hit at the time of the probability change (the random R1021 does not coincide with the jackpot determination value at the time of the probability change shown in FIG. 13A). The jackpot look-ahead notice executed for the memory Z is inconsistent. In the present embodiment, the start winning that occurred during the period from the start of variable display where the display result is a big hit to the end of the big hit gaming state (the period in which the prefetch notice prohibition flag is set), and the reserved memory that becomes a big hit are stored. For start winnings that occur in the stored state, the prefetch notice prohibition table is selected to prevent inconsistencies in the prefetch notice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice prohibition table is selected even for a start winning that occurs in a state in which a hold memory that is out of place and is likely to fall is stored. For example, in the high probability state, with respect to the start winning that occurred immediately after storing the hold memory that falls off and is likely to fall, using the jackpot determination table in the high probability state based on the gaming state at the time of the start winning, If you make a jackpot determination at the start winning prize and execute the pre-reading notice to confirm the jackpot, the game state has fallen to the normal state at the start of the change related to the starting winning prize, so there is a possibility that inconsistency will occur in the pre-reading notice . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the start-ahead notice prohibition table is selected for a start winning that occurs in a state in which a hold memory that is out of place and is likely to fall is stored, so as to prevent inconsistencies in the pre-ahead notice. I have to.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the prefetch notice effect (step S <b> 6012). For example, if it is determined not to execute the prefetching notice effect because there is no distribution in the prefetching notice allocation tables A and B, the process proceeds to step S6020.

  When it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined according to the effect mode determined in step S6011. (Step S6013). In this case, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the prefetch notice effect based on the reception of the variable category 1 command or the variable category 9 command shown in FIG. Then, a pre-run pre-notification in-progress execution flag indicating that execution of the pre-read pre-announcement effect has been decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the variation category 8 command, the variation category 10 command, or the variation category 11 command shown in FIG. When “Super reach is lost”, a reach pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 may have a variation category 23 command, a variation category 26 command, a variation category 27 command, a variation category 28 command, a variation category 29 command, a variation category 30 command, a variation category 31 command shown in FIG. If it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the variable category 32 command, the pre-reading notice will be given based on the determination at the time of winning when “super reach big hit” or “super-short fluctuation big hit”. A jackpot pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that execution of the production has been decided is set.

  In this embodiment, the missed prefetching notice execution flag, the reach prefetching notice execution flag, and the jackpot prefetching notice execution flag are collectively referred to as a prefetching notice execution flag.

  In step S6013, a pre-reading notice execution flag is set, and information that can specify the effect mode determined in step S6011 is set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the effect mode is “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, a flag indicating “mode shift”, a flag indicating “countdown”, “holding ball” A flag indicating “change” and a flag indicating “shooting” may be set. Also, for example, when the pre-reading notice execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which presentation mode is set in a predetermined bit of the pre-reading notice execution flag. By which, it may be possible to specify which production mode is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the current total number of pending storages in the variation counter (step S6014). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total pending storage number specified by the latest total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning command storage area in the variation counter. The variation counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays that are executed until the variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is started. In this embodiment, if the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined during the variation display of the effect symbol and the variation counter is set in step S6014 or step S6030, which will be described later, first, the execution is in progress. At the end of the fluctuation display, the value of the fluctuation counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8312), and as a result, the value of the fluctuation counter is changed up to the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display subject to the winning determination. It becomes 0 and the pre-reading notice effect ends. In step S6014 or step S6030, which will be described later, if the variation of the effect symbol is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 101 may set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current reserved storage number in the variation counter. desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to end the pre-reading notice effect until the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the variation display subjected to the determination at the time of winning. It is possible to prevent both the pre-reading notice effect and the super reach effect from being performed in order to make the effect too busy.

  However, when the effect mode is “shooting”, it is assumed that the effect is continued until the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect ends and the display result is derived and displayed. That is, the effect mode of “shooting” is an effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, and is also an effect mode that makes it easy for the player to grasp the display result of the variable display (whether it is a big hit or missed). Therefore, until the change immediately after the value of the change counter is 0, the effect is continued during variable display and display of the stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, when the effect of the determined pre-reading notice effect is “reserved ball change”, step S6014 is not executed and the variation counter is not set. When the pre-reading notice effect of the effect of “change in holding ball” is determined, the processing of steps S6016 to S6018 described later is executed, and at the timing when the start winning is generated and the command at the start winning is received. The pre-read notice effect is immediately started, and the notice target hold display is erased from the sum hold memory display unit 18c based on the receipt of the sum hold memory number subtraction designation command at the timing when the notice target change display is started. (See steps S661 to S662B), the prefetching notice effect is terminated.

  In the pre-reading notice allocation table shown in FIG. 53, the allocation is performed so that the selection ratio of each effect mode varies depending on the reliability that is a big hit. For example, in order to increase the reliability that is a big hit in the order of “change of the variation form at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, “change of the holding ball” (for example, 20%, 40%, 60% in order) Production modes are allocated (in the case of “countdown”, the big hit is fixed). In addition, the allocation method of each production mode that increases the reliability that is a big hit is not limited to such an order, for example, in the reverse order “change in the holding ball”, “mode transition”, “variation mode at the time of symbol variation” Allocation may be performed so that the reliability that is a big hit becomes higher in the order of "change of". Furthermore, not only in the order of these arrangements, for example, even if the mode of “mode shift” is assigned in the order of arrangement in which the reliability that becomes the biggest jackpot is high, or conversely, the reliability that becomes the biggest jackpot is low. Well, various ways of allocating each production mode are possible.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “reserved ball change” (step S6015). Specifically, it can be confirmed by determining whether or not a pre-reading advance notice execution flag corresponding to the effect mode being “reserved ball change” is set. If the pre-reading notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode is not executed, the process proceeds to step S6020.

  In the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect of the “pending ball change” effect mode, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the latest start prize designation command stored in the start prize command storage area is the first start prize designation command. It is confirmed whether or not (step S6016). If the first start winning designation command is stored, the production control CPU 101 increments the first special display by one as the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c (step S6017).

  In this embodiment, in a normal state (when the pre-reading notice effect is not performed), when a start winning to the first start winning opening 13a occurs, a red round display (hereinafter referred to as a hold display) , The first normal display) is increased by one, and when a start winning to the second start winning opening 13b occurs, a blue round display (hereinafter also referred to as a second normal display) is displayed as a hold display. Increase by one. Then, when the pre-reading notice effect of the “change in reserved ball” effect is started when the start winning is generated, the hold display is increased by one in a special manner different from the normal time. In this embodiment, as a special aspect, the display of a small star shape, a large star shape, a small heart shape, or a large heart shape is increased by one. Further, if a pre-reading notice effect is to be started when a start winning to the first start winning opening 13a occurs, the red star display (also referred to as a first special display) is increased by one and the second start If the pre-reading notice effect is to be started when the start winning to the winning opening 13b occurs, the blue star display (also referred to as second special display) is increased by one.

  If the latest start winning designation command is not the first start winning designation command (that is, if the second start winning designation command is stored), the production control CPU 101 holds the sum in the total hold storage display unit 18c. As the display, the second special display is increased by one (step S6018).

  As described above, when the process of steps S6016 to S6018 is executed, and it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “reserved ball change” is executed, a start prize is generated and a command at the start prize is issued. The pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “change in holding ball” is immediately started at the received timing.

  In step S6020, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the latest start winning designation command stored in the start winning command storage area is the first start winning designation command. If the first start winning designation command is stored, the production control CPU 101 increases the first normal display by one as the hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c (step S6021).

  If the latest start winning designation command is not the first start winning designation command (that is, if the second start winning designation command is stored), the production control CPU 101 holds the sum in the total hold storage display unit 18c. As a display, the second normal display is increased by one (step S6022).

  If the process proceeds to step S6023, it is a case where any of the commands at the time of the start winning is missed or mismatched and the command at the time of the start winning cannot be received normally. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the latest command stored in the start winning command storage area, and at least a command other than the start winning designation command (that is, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the total pending storage number). It is confirmed whether or not a (designated command) has been received (step S6023). Specifically, the missing command in the storage area storing the latest command in the start winning command storage area is only the start winning designation command (first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command). Yes, if the design designation command, the variation category command, and the combined pending storage number designation command other than that are stored in order, and the contents of the design designation command and the variation category command are also consistent, at least other than the start winning designation command Since three commands (design designation command, variation category command, and total pending storage number designation command) can be received, there is a possibility that a certain level of credibility can be secured. If any command other than the start winning designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S6031.

  When it is determined that at least a command other than the start winning designation command is received, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all the variation category commands stored in the start winning command storage area, and extracts each extracted variation category. Based on the command, all of the variable category commands stored as the determination result at the time of winning for the previous start winning are “non-reach miss” (command C600 (H) non-reach CA2-1 designation or command C608 super-shortened CA2 It is checked whether or not (-9 designation) (step S6024). If all are “non-reach”, the process proceeds to step S6025. If even one variation category command other than “non-reach” is included, the process proceeds to step S6031 without executing the processes in steps S6025 to S6030.

  If all are “non-reach” in step S6024, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S6025). If the high probability state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6031. If the high probability state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the prefetching notice allocation table C as a table for determining the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the effect mode of the prefetching notice effect (step S6026).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a prefetching notice effect mode determining random number for determining the effect type of the prefetching notice effect, and extracts the value of the extracted prefetching notice effect mode determination random number based on the received variation category command. Is determined as to which of the determination values included in the prefetching notice allocation table selected in step S6026 matches the prefetching notice effect execution state and the production mode (step S6027).

  In step S6027, the effect control CPU 101 uses the pre-reading notice allocation table C at the time of abnormal command reception shown in FIG. 53C selected in step S6026 to determine the variation pattern type indicated by the received variation category command. Based on the determination result at the time of winning a prize, an effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table C, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a change pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 by a change category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). 53 (C) only when the determination result at the time of winning indicating that “there is a non-reach out” without being accompanied) is shown (specifically, when the command C600 (H) is received). As shown in Fig. 4, it is decided to execute a pre-reading notice effect of any effect mode of "change of the variation pattern at the time of symbol change" or "mode shift", and "super reach loss" or "super reach big hit" In such a case, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed. In other words, in this embodiment, if any of the commands at the time of starting winning a prize cannot be received normally, it is possible to execute “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “execution of non-reach” or Only the pre-reading notice effect of the “mode shift” effect mode (so-called “gaze pre-reading notice effect”) can be executed, and the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect is prevented from being lowered more than necessary. It is not executed only in the case of “non-reach out”, but for example, in the case of “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed at a low rate in the notice allocation table C. Allocation may be performed. By doing so, when the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “change of pattern at the time of symbol change” or “mode transition” is executed, it is not necessarily determined that it is “non-reach”. can do.

  In this embodiment, even if any command at the time of the start winning prize is not received normally, if a command other than the start winning designation command is received, only the so-called GAS pre-reading notice effect is received. Although the case where it is configured to be executable is shown, the processing of steps S6023 to S6030 is not executed, and if any of the start winning commands cannot be received normally, setting and execution of the pre-reading notice effect You may comprise so that it may not perform at all. In particular, it is specified by a command that any one of the commands at the time of starting winning (design designation command, variation category command, starting winning designation command, combined pending storage number designation command) could not be received normally. Since it is considered that the credibility of the information is low, it is most preferable that the prefetching notice effect of all the production modes is not executed during the prefetching notice setting restriction period (the processing in steps S8006 to S8014 described later is not performed). Is desirable).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the prefetch notice effect (step S6028). For example, if it is determined not to execute the prefetching notice effect because there is no distribution in the prefetching notice allocation table C, the process proceeds to step S6031.

  When it is determined to execute the prefetching notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetching notice execution flag indicating that execution of the prefetching notice effect has been decided according to the effect mode determined in step S6027. (Step S6029).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the current total pending storage number in the fluctuation counter (step S6030). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total pending storage number specified by the latest total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning command storage area in the variation counter. Then, control goes to a step S6032.

  In step S6031, the effect control CPU 101 sets the undetermined information in the storage area for the latest command in the start winning command storage area (step S6031). Specifically, in FIG. 46, the value of the undetermined information in the storage area storing the latest command is set to “1”.

  In step S6032, the CPU 101 for effect control differs from any of the first normal display, the second normal display, the first special display, and the second special display for all the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c. In addition to changing to the spill mode, the hold display of the spill mode is increased by one. In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 changes all the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c to a green round display and increases the green round display by one. Note that the hold display in the missed mode is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the hold display may be changed to a color other than green (for example, yellow), and the shape of the hold display is changed. (For example, the hold display may be changed to a triangle display or the like).

  In this embodiment, when a command is missed or inconsistent at the time of a start winning prize is shown, all pending displays displayed on the total pending storage display unit 18c are changed. Only the hold display for the hold memory that has been lost or inconsistent is displayed in a drop-off manner, and the first normal display, the second normal display, the first special display, and the second special display are displayed for the previous hold display. It may be continued. In addition, after a command is missed or inconsistent, during the prefetch notice setting limit period, a pending display may be displayed in a missed manner for a pending storage that has occurred, or the normal first normal display Or the second normal display.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets a prefetch notice setting restriction flag (step S6033), and starts a prefetch notice setting restriction period.

  In this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (see Y in step S6002), the process proceeds to step S6020, and the determination of command omission or inconsistency from step S6004 onward is not performed. In this case, even when the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the same processing as in steps S6004 to S6006 is executed to determine whether a command is missed or inconsistency occurs. If it is determined that inconsistency has occurred, the same process as in step S6033 may be executed to set the prefetch notice setting restriction flag and start the prefetch notice setting restriction period. Alternatively, the same processing as that in step S6032 may be executed to change all the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c to a missing form.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. The display will not start.

  FIGS. 55 and 56 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the prefetch notice setting restriction flag is set (step S8000). If the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is not set (that is, not during the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period), the process proceeds to step S8015.

  If the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is set (that is, during the pre-fetching notice setting restriction period), the production control CPU 101 displays the contents of the command at the start winning prize stored in the start winning command storage area. Confirmation is made (step S8001). Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not all the storage areas 1 to 8 in which the commands for the start winning prize are stored are in a storage state in which all the commands for the start winning prize are received in order. (Step S8002).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, four commands of a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a starting winning designating command, and a combined reserved memory number designating command are grouped in one timer interrupt as commands at the time of starting winning a prize. Therefore, if commands are stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, The commands “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) and “C2 (H)” should be stored (see FIG. 19). Therefore, if any of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 still has a storage area in a storage state in which a command is lost due to noise or garbled data of the MODE data. , It can be determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the command could not be received correctly.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the design designation command, the variation category command, the start prize designation command, and the combined pending storage number designation command should be received in this order, all the storage areas 1 to 1 in the start prize command storage area 8, if the command is stored, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”), and “C2 (H)”. Are stored in the order of "." Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, the effect control CPU 101 may store “C6 (H)” before “C4 (H)” if the order is different. In other words, it can be determined that there is still a storage area in a storage state in which the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  If the received storage start area for which it is determined that the command at the time of the start winning prize is not in order or is partially missing still remains, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in a storage state where all the commands at the time of starting winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in the command storing area at the starting winning prize. In all the storage areas 1 to 8, it is confirmed whether or not the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent (step S8003). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a deviation as a symbol designation command is stored, the variation category 1 command to the variation category 12 command corresponding to the deviation as the variation category command are stored. One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 20 and 21). Nevertheless, when the variation category 21 command to variation category 26 command (see FIG. 22) corresponding to the jackpot is stored, the effect control CPU 101 matches the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command. It can be determined that there is still a storage area with a storage state that is not inconsistent.

  If it is determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state where the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command do not match, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in a storage state in which the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent, the effect control CPU 101 stores the command in the start winning prize command storage area. In all the storage areas 1-8, it is confirmed whether or not the contents of the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are consistent (step S8004). Specifically, a first start winning designation command for designating that there has been a start winning at the first start winning opening 13a, or a second start winning design for designating that there has been a start winning at the second start winning opening 13b. Even if the specified command is stored, if the total pending storage number indicated by the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning command storage area is 0, the effect control The CPU 101 can determine that the contents of the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are not consistent and there is still a storage area in a storage state having a contradiction.

  If it is determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command are not consistent, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. In the case where it is determined that the contents of the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are consistent in all the storage areas 1 to 8, the production control CPU 101 restricts the pre-reading advance notice setting. The flag is reset (step S8005). That is, since all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area are in a storage state in which the start winning command has been normally received, the command that triggered the start of the pre-reading notice setting limit period It is determined that the pending storage that has been missed or inconsistent has been consumed, the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is reset, and the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period ends.

  In this embodiment, the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is reset at the timing when the variable display is started when the pending storage where the command is missed or inconsistency is consumed, and the prefetching notice setting restriction period is set. This is not limited to this timing. For example, the pre-reading notice setting limit period ends at the timing when the variable display is terminated when the pending memory that has been missed or inconsistent is exhausted. You may make it do. In this case, for example, the same process as steps S8000 to S8005 may be performed in the effect symbol variation stop process to be described later, the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag may be reset, and the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period may be terminated.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is any of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area where the value of the undetermined information is set to “1” (step S8006). ). If there is one for which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1” (that is, if there is a pre-reading notice effect setting process that has not been executed in the pending storage that occurred during the prefetching notice setting restriction period) The process proceeds to step S8007. If there is no information in which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1”, the process proceeds to step S8015.

  In this embodiment, if there are a plurality of storage areas in which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1” in the start winning command storage area, the most recently stored storage (mostly The processing of steps S8007 to S8013 is performed for the command at the time of starting winning for (holding memory corresponding to the last winning winning), and the setting process of the prefetching notice effect for the holding memory generated during the prefetching notice setting restriction period Shall be performed retroactively. For all commands stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8007 to S8013 can be performed to set the pre-reading notice effect retroactively. You may make it determine whether it exists.

  If there is one for which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1”, the production control CPU 101 extracts all the variable category commands from the storage area in which the commands are stored before the undetermined storage area. Then, based on each of the extracted variation category commands, all the variation category commands stored as winning determination results for the start winnings up to the previous undetermined storage area are all “non-reach” (command C600 (H) In step S8007). If all are “non-reach”, the process proceeds to step S8008. If even one variable category command other than “non-reach” is included, the process proceeds to step S8014 without executing the processes in steps S8008 to S8013.

  If all are “non-reach” in step S8007, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S8008). If the high probability state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8014. If the high probability state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the prefetching notice allocation table D as a table for determining the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the effect mode of the prefetching notice effect (step S8009).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a prefetching notice effect mode determining random number for determining the effect type of the prefetching notice effect, and extracts the value of the extracted prefetching notice effect mode determination random number based on the received variation category command. Is determined as to which of the determination values included in the prefetching notice allocation table selected in step S8009 matches the prefetching notice effect execution state and the production mode (step S8010).

  In step S8010, the effect control CPU 101 uses the prefetching notice allocation table D at the time of releasing the prefetching notice setting restriction shown in FIG. 53 (D) selected in step S8009, and the variation pattern type indicated by the received variation category command. Based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table D, for example, the effect control CPU 101 uses the change category command to change to the non-reach CA2-1 change pattern type (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). (When the command C600 (H) is received), or when the variable category command is used, the super CA2 is displayed. When the winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is −7 (that is, “becomes super-reach”) (specifically, when the command C607 (H) is received) When winning a prize indicating that the variation category type is a variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 (that is, “super reach jackpot”). When a fixed result is indicated (specifically, when command C612 (H) or command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. It is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “change of” or “mode shift”.

  In addition, for example, regarding the pre-reading notice effect of the “pending ball change” effect mode, if it is executed retroactively with respect to the undetermined holding memory at the time of releasing the pre-reading notice setting restriction period, the total hold memory display unit 18c is displayed. The hold display already displayed as the first normal display or the second normal display is changed from the middle to the first special display or the second special display, and an unnatural hold display is executed. Become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (D), in this embodiment, the prefetching notice allocation table D at the time of canceling the prefetching notice setting restriction is allocated to the prefetching notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode. Is not performed, and the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “change in reserved ball” is not retroactively executed.

  Note that, for example, the pre-reading notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is a pre-reading effect that counts down in a continuous manner over a plurality of variable displays, and is stored in an undetermined pending storage when the pre-reading notice setting limit period is canceled. On the other hand, if it is executed retroactively, an unnatural effect such that the countdown starts from a change display in the middle is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53D, in this embodiment, the prefetching notice allocation table D at the time of releasing the prefetching notice setting restriction is allocated to the prefetching notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode. The pre-reading notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is not retroactively executed. That is, regarding the pre-reading notice effect of the continuous effect mode, in order to prevent the effect from becoming unnatural, it is not retroactively executed when the pre-reading notice setting restriction period is canceled. In this embodiment, the “continuous effect” executed in a continuous manner over a plurality of variable displays corresponds to the pre-reading notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the prefetch notice effect (step S8011). For example, if it is determined not to execute the prefetching notice effect because there is no distribution in the prefetching notice allocation table D, the process proceeds to step S8014.

  When it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that the pre-reading notice effect has been determined according to the effect mode determined in step S8010. (Step S8012).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 receives a set of commands at the time of start winning (symbol designation command, variable category command) received before the command to be determined for the pre-reading notice effect and stored in the start winning command storage area. , The number of start winning designation commands and the combination pending storage number designation command) is identified, and the identified number (that is, the number of variation displays up to the previous one of the variation display to be notified) is set in the variation counter. (Step S8013).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the values of the undetermined information in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area to “0” (step S8014).

  In this embodiment, a case has been shown in which a pre-reading advance notice setting is configured to be executable and can be set retroactively for pending storage that has not been determined when the pre-reading notice setting restriction period is canceled. However, the pre-reading notice effect may not be set and executed retroactively with respect to the undetermined hold storage. In this case, specifically, after the process of step S8005 is executed, the process proceeds to step S8015 as it is, and the processes of steps S8006 to S8014 are not executed. In this case, it is not necessary to provide a storage area for setting the undetermined information in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8015). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8002 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8016). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8016, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8016. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. In addition, when it is determined in step S8016 that the production control CPU 101 executes the continuous production of the production mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, the so-called chance eye symbol is used as the stop symbol of the production symbol. (For example, a combination of symbols that do not reach, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted). The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8016, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 57, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R jackpot A” or “15R jackpot B” (the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation). In the case of a command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same symbol as stop symbols. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be varied depending on whether “15R big hit A” or “15R big hit B”. For example, in the case of “15R big hit A”, the ratio of determining the combination of production symbols in which the three symbols are arranged with the same odd number of symbols is increased, and in the case of “15R big hit B”, the three symbols have the same even number. You may make it raise the ratio which determines the combination of the production | presentation symbol arranged with the symbol.

  In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area designates a big hit, specifically, a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command. It is determined whether or not there is (step S8016A). When it is determined in step S8016A that the big hit is designated (Y), a prefetch notice prohibition flag is set (step S8016B), and step S8017 is executed. If it is determined in step S8016A that the jackpot is not designated (N) (in the case of a display result 1 designation command), the process proceeds to step S8017. The prefetch notice prohibition flag set here is reset at the end of the big hit gaming state controlled after the change is stopped, specifically, upon receipt of the big hit end designation command (step S643).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the effect display device 9 to display a notice effect (a notice effect other than the pre-reading notice effect. (Notice announcement effect.) Is executed or a notice effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the notice effect is executed (step S8017).

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the super reach D is executed (when the big hit A is generated), the accessory act effect that the movable member 78 operates immediately after the start of the change of the effect symbol is executed. The player is informed of the occurrence of the big hit A. If you perform an effect that suggests that there is an extremely high probability of winning a big hit, such as this role-playing effect, immediately after the start of the change of the production pattern, until the transition to the jackpot gaming state During the period, there is a problem that the player's interest in the game decreases. Here, in the notice effect setting processing in step S8017, when super reach D is executed, it is preferable to give priority to the notice effect that is normally executed with priority. For example, in the case of Super Reach A to C, a premier notice with a low appearance rate may be made to appear with a high probability in the case of Super Reach D after the effect activation. Thereby, it is possible to have an interest in the effect after the effect act activation effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the prefetching notice effect and other notice effects when executing the variation pattern, the prefetch notice effect, and other notice effects (step S8018). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8019).

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 58 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  The effect control CPU 101 is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect and other notice effects, and when the pre-reading notice execution flag and other notice execution flags are set, the prefetching is performed in step S8018. A process table corresponding to the notice effect or other notice effects is selected.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, there are cases where the super reach C is executed when the display result of the variable display becomes a big hit symbol and when the probability change falls by the probability change fall lottery. Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control executes an effect that is not in super reach C when super PG1-1 is received as a variation pattern command, and is a big hit in super reach C when super PG1-2 is received. The production which becomes becomes. Here, in Super Reach C, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), an effect in which the teammate 1100 and the enemy character 1200 battle is executed. In this example, by displaying “If the win is a big hit, if it is defeated” at the start of the battle, if the player wins an effect that the ally character 1100 wins, the player wins an effect that the ally character 1100 loses. This suggests that there will be a certain fall.

  When receiving the super PG 1-1 as the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 performs a defeat effect in which the ally character loses in the battle and stops and displays the off symbol (FIG. 77 (c)), and super PG1 as the variation pattern command. When -2 is received, the teammate 1100 performs a victory effect in which the battle is won and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (FIG. 77 (d)). Since the super reach C, which is a common effect, is executed between the case where the deviation and the fall that is likely to fall are executed in this way, and the case where the change that becomes a big hit is executed, the player is super reach C. Pay attention to the performance of the battle mode to be executed, and expect the ally character 1100 to win. In this way, by performing a common performance between the case where the probability change falls and the case where it is a big hit, the player grasps the probability change fall and is discouraged before the effect design is stopped and displayed. Try to prevent.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the high base state in the case where the probability change falls occurs (when the steps S107D and S107E are executed after being determined as Y in the step S107B) and the big hit occurs The timing at which the high base state is terminated (the timing at which steps S107D and S107E are executed after Y is determined in step S107F) is made to coincide. In this example, the high base state is terminated at the timing before the start of change (within the change pattern setting process). For this reason, at the start of fluctuation with Super Reach C, the high base state has ended regardless of whether it is a probable fall or a big hit, and after the player starts fluctuation with Super Reach C, the variable winning ball Even if the opening time and the number of opening times of the device 15 are observed, it is impossible to determine whether it is a probability change fall or a big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, a left strike is performed in which a game ball is shot aiming at the left game area 7A, and the game ball is awarded to the first start winning opening 13a. On the other hand, in the high probability / high base state, when the game ball is passed through the gate 32, the variable winning ball device 15 is frequently released. Therefore, the player hits the right game area 7B and hits the right ball. For this reason, in the high probability / high base state, an arrow indicating the direction of the right game area 7B is displayed at the bottom of the screen as shown in FIG. Is displayed. As described above, when the display result is a big hit, or when it is determined that there is a probability change fall by the probability change fall lottery (for example, when Super Reach C is executed), the timing (change pattern before the start of change) is once set. In the setting process, the high base state ends. Accordingly, the special variable winning ball device 20 is not opened during the fluctuation period involving a big hit or a probable fall, and the variable winning ball device 15 is not frequently released even if the game ball passes through the gate 32. The need for is reduced. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), with respect to fluctuations with big hits or probability variation falls (for example, fluctuations with super reach C), the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop display of the production symbol is right. The strike is not displayed.

  Then, when the display result of the effect symbol is off (that is, the probability change falls), since the end of the high base state is confirmed, in order to urge the player to make a left strike, as shown in FIG. An arrow indicating the direction of the left game area 7 </ b> A is displayed together with a display of “aiming left”. On the other hand, when the display result of the effect symbol is a big hit, the player will aim to win the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, so that the player can make a right strike at the bottom of the screen as shown in FIG. 77 (d). Is displayed with an arrow indicating the direction of the right game area 7B. In this way, during fluctuations after the high base state ends (during fluctuations that cause big hits or fluctuations that have fallen out and are likely to fall), the right-handed again after the stop display of the production symbol, or left-handed Since it is uncertain whether to return to, the right-handed display is not performed in order to prevent confusion of the player.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, the production component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27 as an effect part is executed (step S8020). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8021). Next, the production control CPU 101 uses a start winning command (design designation command, variable category command, start winning designation command, and so on) stored in the first storage area (storage area 1) of the start winning command storage area. (Total pending storage number designation command) is deleted, and the content of the command storage area at the start winning prize is shifted (step S8022).

  In this embodiment, there is a case where the prefetching notice effect is configured to be restartable from the next fluctuation display after digesting the fluctuation display that caused the command miss and inconsistency and caused the prefetching notice setting restriction period. Although, for example, the shift process of step S8022 is executed after it is determined as Y in step S811 of the variation pattern command reception waiting process, a command is missed or an inconsistency causes a prefetching notice setting limit period. The pre-reading notice effect may be configured to be restartable from the changed display. In this case, for example, if the change display that caused the missed-out command or inconsistency and caused the pre-reading notice setting restriction period is “non-reach”, it caused the pre-reading notice setting restriction period. A pre-reading notice effect may be executed in the variable display.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8023).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether any of the pre-reading notice execution flags (except for the pre-reading notice execution flag corresponding to the pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the effect of “holding ball change”) is set. Confirmation is made (step S8106). If any pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control “changes the variation mode at the time of symbol change” according to the effect mode determined in the pre-reading notice effect mode determination process in steps S6011, S6027, and S8010. ”,“ Mode shift ”,“ Countdown ”, or“ Shooting ”is executed to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode (step S8108). In addition, when it is determined to execute a pre-reading notice effect (however, a pre-reading notice effect of an effect mode other than “change in holding ball”), specifically, a predetermined time after the start of the change of the effect symbol At the timing when elapses, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode. When the prefetching notice effect is executed, it is determined as Y in step S8106 at the timing of executing the prefetching notice effect, and the process of step S8108 is executed. Then, it is determined to be Y repeatedly in step S8106 until the prefetch notice effect is finished, and the process of step S8108 is executed.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8112).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (offset symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302). When the jackpot symbol is not displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the loss symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the presentation control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311.

  When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and indicates that the jackpot start designation command has been received. It is checked whether a start designation command reception flag is set (step S8305). When the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306) and selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1), the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speaker 27 as the production component, and the movable member 78 as the production component). Control is executed (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  If it is decided not to make a big hit (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control responds to any pre-reading notice effect of any pre-reading notice execution flag (however, the “reserved ball change” effect mode). It is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice execution flag is set (step S8311). If it is set, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (step S8312). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S8313). Then, if the value of the fluctuation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the pre-reading notice corresponding to the set pre-reading notice execution flag (however, the “preserving ball change” effect mode pre-reading notice effect). (Excluding the execution flag) is reset (step S8316). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect (effects other than “change in reserved ball”) is displayed until the change display one before the start of the change that has been determined for winning. Is executed, and the pre-reading notice execution flag is reset at the start of the variable display subject to the determination at the time of winning (the pre-reading notice is displayed during the variable display subject to the determination at the time of winning). There will be no directing). Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be executed even during the variable display that is the target of the winning determination. In this embodiment, the “shooting” effect is the target of the winning determination. This is executed even during the change display and the derivation display of the stop symbol.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8317). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 54, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8318).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received is set (step S1901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1902), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25, 28, etc.) is executed (step S1903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and performs an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S1901), the production control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening open flag (step S1907) and selects process data corresponding to the production during the round. (Step S1908). Here, in this embodiment, a background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state is set as the background screen during the round based on the value of the high probability state background continuation counter. That is, if the background screen before the start of the big hit gaming state is a background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state, the background screen is continuously displayed during the round. In the example of FIG. 78, since two small UFOs 1003 (background color is blue) are displayed as the background screen during the round, the jackpot has a high probability state background continuation counter value of 101 to 200 (101 to 101 in this example). 120).

  Further, display corresponding to the values of the continuous channel counter and the high probability state background continuation counter is set for the background screen (step S1908A). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, setting is performed so that the number of consecutive chunks 1400 and the player's rank 1500 are displayed at the upper part of the screen during the round effect in the effect display device 9. In this example, 5 consecutive wins are displayed, indicating that the number of consecutive chants is 5. In this example, the value of the continuous channel counter is updated when a big hit occurs in a high probability state (and within a predetermined number of fluctuations after falling from the high probability state). The big hit (the so-called first hit) in the normal state, which is the base point for counting the count, is not included in the value of the continuous counter. Therefore, in this example, the value of the continuous channel counter + 1 (the initial hit) is displayed as the continuous channel count 1400. In this way, the interest of the game is improved by displaying the number of consecutive chunks on the screen during the round.

  FIG. 62 is a table for determining the rank 1500 displayed on the upper part of the screen during the round presentation, and the rank is determined based on the values of the continuous channel counter and the high probability state background continuation counter. In this example, the high probability state background continuation counter value when the continuous counter is 4 is ranked as the most advanced person when the value is 80 or less, the advanced person when 81 to 120, and the intermediate person when 121 or more. In other words, the smaller the number of fluctuations until the number of consecutive chunks reaches 5, the higher the ranking. In the example of FIG. 62, it is ranked as an advanced player. In this way, ranking is performed according to the values of the continuous channel counter and the high probability state counter. Therefore, the interest is improved by elements other than the background screen, and the player is not bored. Also, even if the number of consecutive chunks is the same, the interest is improved by changing the rank according to the high-probability state background continuation counter value.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S1909), and sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S1910).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts one effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step S880). And it is confirmed whether the production period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step S881). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the confirmation of reception of the ending command, for example, during the round process (see step S805).

  If the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S881), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S882). In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect part). Then, various lamps as effect parts and control of the speaker 27 as effect parts are executed (step S883), for example, an effect of displaying the end of the big hit or displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed. .

  Next, when the process timer has not timed out (N in step S884), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step S884), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S885). Further, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S886).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S881), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S888). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S889).

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the prefetch notice effect will be described. FIG. 64 to FIG. 69 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of effects of the pre-reading notice effect. Among these, FIG. 64 shows a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”. FIG. 65 shows a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode change”. FIG. 66 shows a specific example of the effect of the “countdown” prefetching notice effect. FIG. 67 shows a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in reserved ball”. FIG. 68 and FIG. 69 show a specific example of the production mode of the pre-reading notice effect of “shooting”. In addition, in FIGS. 64-69, the aspect of an effect screen changes in order of (1) (2) (3) .... Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, determination at the time of winning is made with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13a, and the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, the pre-reading notice effect is shown when the game is held, but the determination at the time of winning is made with respect to the start winning to the second start winning opening 13b, and the change of the effect symbol is synchronized with the change display of the second special symbol. Even when the pre-reading notice effect is performed during display, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same manner. In the example shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, the winning determination is made with respect to the start winning to the second start winning opening 13b, and the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol. This shows a case where a pre-reading notice effect is performed.

  First, referring to FIG. 64, a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 64, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 64 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13a. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Further, within the same interruption, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command as the pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221), and the production control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 64 (2), based on the received first start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command, the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c (in this example, the first normal display) Is increased by 1 (see step S6021). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, and “the change in the variation mode at the time of symbol change” as the effect of the pre-reading notice effect. "Is determined (see step S800A). Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 64 (1) and 64 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 64 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (5), the variation time ends, and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 64 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 64 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 64 (6), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 64 (6), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the change of the effect symbol starts (see step S8108). Note that the predetermined effect performed at the start of the change of the effect symbol is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 64. A movable object having a shape imitating a character or the like like the movable member 78 may be moved at the start of the change, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of the change. Further, for example, the way of starting the change of the design at the start of the change of the effect design may be made different from normal. For example, in the case where the left, middle, and right production symbols usually start to change at the same time, the left, middle, and right production symbols start to change at different timings, or once start to change upward (or downward) As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation may be started downward (or upward). Conversely, in FIG. 64 (5), the way of stopping the variation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, but the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, middle, and right.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (7), the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner (see step S8105), and as shown in FIG. Step S8302). 64 (6) and (7), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 64 (8).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 64 (9), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect. . Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (9), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8108). Also in the case shown in FIG. 64 (9), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol.

  Thereafter, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect in the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 64, during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. When the stop display is performed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is also stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol. Then, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is continuously displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol until the next variable display is started. This also applies to the case where the prefetch notice effect is executed in the effect modes shown in FIGS. Further, when the game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the display in the fourth symbol display area may not be performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 65, a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 65, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 65 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13a. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Further, within the same interruption, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command as the pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221), and the production control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 65 (2), based on the received first start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command, the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c (in this example, the first normal display) Is increased by 1 (see step S6021). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 decides execution of the pre-reading notice effect and decides “mode shift” as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800A). Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 65 (1) and 65 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 65 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 65 (4), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 65 (4), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect. An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background) An effect of a mode in which the screen is in contact with the screen is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (5), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 65 ( In 5), the dissociation symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 65 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 65 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 65 (6), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol change display as shown in FIG. An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background screen) The effect of an aspect that makes it seem to meet is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (7), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 65 ( In step 7), the off symbol) is stopped (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 65 (6), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 65 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 65 (8), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol change display as shown in FIG. An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background screen) The effect of an aspect that makes it seem to meet is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (9), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 65 ( In 9), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 65 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 65 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the subject of determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect in the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed. In this case, when the display result of the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is “big hit”, for example, after performing the effect in such a manner that the two background screens overlap each other, Alternatively, the background screen that has interrupted from the side wins and the background screen is switched, and the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, the mode of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. You may make it perform the effect of the aspect from which a background screen changes for every display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a specific example of the effect of the “countdown” pre-reading notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 66, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 66 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13a. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Further, within the same interruption, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command as the pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221), and the production control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 66 (2), based on the received first start winning designation command and total pending storage number designation command, the pending display in the total pending storage display portion 18c (in this example, the first normal display) Is increased by 1 (see step S6021). In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 decides execution of the pre-reading notice effect and “countdown” as the production mode of the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800A). Note that the number of counts in the “countdown” pre-reading notice effect may be, for example, the total pending storage number when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Alternatively, a pre-counter notice effect of “count down” may be determined on condition that there is a predetermined number (for example, 2 or more) of reserved memories that can be counted down. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 66 (1) and 66 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 66 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 66 (4), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 66 (4). A character string such as “Count 3!” Is displayed on the display screen of the display device 9 and an effect is performed as if the countdown was started (see step S8108). Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 66 (5), the final stop symbol (the off symbol in FIG. 66 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 66 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 66 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 66 (6). A character string such as “Count 2!” Is displayed on the display screen of the device 9 and the effect is such that the countdown continues (see step S8108). Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 66 (7), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 66 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 66 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 66 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 66 (8), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect during the effect symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 66 (8). A character string such as “Count 1!” Is displayed on the display screen of the device 9 and the effect is such that the countdown continues (see step S8108). Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 66 (9), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 66 (9)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 66 (8), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 66 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the subject of determination at the time of winning is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a specific example of the production mode of the pre-reading notice effect of “reserved ball change” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 67, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (2), when the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 67 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13a. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Also, within the same interrupt, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command as pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, and also determines “change in reserved ball” as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect. (See step S800A). Then, by determining “change in reserved ball” as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 67 (2), receives the received first start winning designation command and the summed hold memory. Based on the number designation command, the first special display (red, small star shape, large star shape, small heart shape, or large heart shape) is incremented by 1 in the total pending storage display unit 18c (see step S6017), and the start prize is received. Is generated and the pre-reading notice effect is immediately started at the timing when the command at the start winning prize is received. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 67 (1) and 67 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 67 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (4), each hold display including the remaining first special display is shifted one by one, and the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “change in hold ball” continues. Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 67 (5), the final stop symbol (the off symbol in FIG. 67 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 67 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 67 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (6), each hold display including the remaining first special display is shifted one by one, and the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “holding ball change” is continued. Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 67 (7), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 67 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 67 (6), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 67 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 67 (8), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (8), each holding display including the remaining first special display is shifted one by one, and the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “holding ball change” is continued. Then, after the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 67 (9), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 67 (9)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 67 (8), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9a for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9b for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 67 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the subject of determination at the time of winning is started. Then, the hold memory is digested for each variable display, and the “holding ball change” is continued until the notice hold display (the first special display in the example shown in FIG. 67) is erased from the combined hold storage display unit 18c. The pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode is continued.

  However, as described above, the prefetch notice prohibition flag is set from the time when the big hit hold memory is stored until the big hit ends, and the start winning notice generated during the setting of the prefetch notice prohibition flag will be Execution is restricted (prohibited in this example).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, a specific example of the production mode of the pre-reading notice effect of “shooting” will be described. This pre-shooting notice effect of “shooting” is a variation category 9 command (super) indicating that the super winning variation is already shifted to the storage area 1 to 3 of the start winning command storage area at the time of starting winning at the second starting port 13b. Short CA2-9 designation) is stored, and the variable category command associated with the start prize (storage area 4) is a variable category 9 command (super short CA2-9 designation) or a variable category 29 command (super short CA3-6 designation) ) Or a variation category 32 command (specifying ultra-short CA3-6).

  In the example shown in FIG. 68, first, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 68 (1). In addition, it is assumed that there is a start winning (a storage of a variable category 29 command or a variable category 32 command indicating that a big win is caused by a super shortening change) in the second start winning opening 13b. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1228). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1229 and S1230). Further, within the same interruption, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the second start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command as the pending storage information (see steps S1231 and S1232), and the production control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 68 (2), based on the received second start winning designation command and total pending storage number designation command, the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c (in this example, the second normal display) Is increased by 1 (see step S6022). In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 decides to execute the pre-reading notice effect and determines “shooting” as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800A). Note that the number of shots (the number of bullet holes remaining on the displayed target) in the pre-reading notice effect of “shooting” may be, for example, the total number of reserved memories when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Here, on the condition that there is a predetermined number (4 in this example) of pending storage that can execute the shooting effect, it is possible to determine the pre-reading notice effect of “shooting”. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 68 (1) and 68 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the second special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 68 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 68 (4), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “shooting” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 68 (4). The shooting target 1500 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 9 (see step S8108). At this time, it is assumed that the effect symbol is displayed small in the lower right of the effect display device 9.

  “Hit” is displayed at the center of the target 1500, indicating that a big hit will occur if it hits the center (if a bullet hole remains). During the period in which the target 1500 is displayed (the period in which the shooting effect is being executed), the effect symbol variation display is all super-short variation, so the effect symbol variation display is performed as in the normal state. However, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the production pattern is fluctuating. For this reason, a bullet hole is left on the target 1500 for each variation display (every time the reserved memory is consumed) so that the player can easily grasp the execution of the variable display (the reserved memory is consumed).

  Then, based on the fact that “shooting” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 is positioned farthest from the center of the target 1500 (outermost circumference) during the effect symbol display. After displaying the “first shot” (see step S8108), when the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 68 (5), the final stop symbol (disconnected symbol in FIG. 68 (5)) is stopped and displayed. (See Step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 68 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the second special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 68 (5).

  Since the “first shot” bullet hole displayed here is away from the center of the target 1500, the player can grasp that no big hit occurs. As for the position of the bullet holes displayed on the target 1500, the effect control micro is set so that the distance between the center of the target 1500 and the bullet holes is closer in the order of "first shot", "second shot", and "third shot". The computer 100 determines the coordinates of the bullet holes. Specific coordinates may be determined based on a predetermined random number, or may be determined based on a predetermined pattern. If the display result corresponding to the “fourth shot” is a big hit, it is determined to display a bullet hole at the center of the target 1500, and if it is out of place, a position off the center of the target 1500 ( For example, it is determined to display bullet holes on a predetermined random number or a predetermined pattern. In addition, once the “shooting” effect is executed, the “first shot”, “second shot”, and “third shot” bullet holes are continuously displayed until the “fourth shot” bullet holes are displayed. Is done.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and reduces the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c by 1 (see step S662A). The change display of the effect design is executed. Then, based on the fact that “shooting” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets “2” at the second closest position from the center of the target 1500 during the display of the effect symbol variation. After displaying the bullet mark of “shot” (see step S8108), when the variation time is over, as shown in FIG. 68 (6), the final stop symbol (the off symbol in FIG. 68 (6)) is stopped and displayed (step (See S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 68 (6), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the second special symbol, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received. Based on this, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and reduces the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c by 1 (see step S662A). The change display of the effect design is executed. Then, based on the fact that “shooting” has been determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the “third shot” at the position closest to the center of the target 1500 during the change display of the effect symbol. ”Is displayed (see step S8108), and when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 68 (7), the final stop symbol (disconnected symbol in FIG. 68 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). ). Also in the case shown in FIG. 68 (7), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the second special symbol, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received. Based on this, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and reduces the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c by 1 (see step S662A). The change display of the effect design is executed. Then, based on the fact that “shooting” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a “fourth” bullet hole at the center of the target 1500 during the display of the effect symbol variation. In addition to the display (see step S8108), a message “Instant!” Is displayed to notify the player that the center of the target 1500 has been punched (that is, to notify the jackpot). Then, when the variation time ends, the production control microcomputer 100 stops and displays the final stop symbol (the big hit symbol in FIG. 68 (8a)) as shown in FIG. 68 (8a) (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 68 (8a), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the second special symbol, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received. Based on this, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol.

  When the variation category command stored at the time of winning the second start winning opening 13b shown in FIG. 68 (2) does not specify a big hit with the super shortened variation, but specifies a deviation with the super shortened variation. In addition, as shown in the look-ahead notice allocation table B in FIG. In that case, an effect shown in FIG. 69 (8b) is executed instead of FIG. 68 (8a).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 68 (7), after the final stop symbol (the off symbol in FIG. 68 (7)) is stopped (see step S8302), the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the variation pattern command and display. The result designation command and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command are received, the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is executed. Then, based on the fact that “shooting” has been determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets “the fourth occurrence” at a position off the center of the target 1500 during the change display of the effect symbol. Is displayed (see step S8108), and a “unfortunate” message is displayed to notify the player that the center of the target 1500 has not been pierced (that is, to notify the player of the miss). Then, when the variation time ends, the production control microcomputer 100 stops and displays the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 69 (8b)) as shown in FIG. 69 (8b) (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 69 (8b), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the second special symbol, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received. Based on this, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol.

  In this way, when the super-shortening variation continuously occurs in the high base state for a predetermined number (4 in this example) or more, if the player shows the variable display of the production symbol as in the normal state, the player It is difficult to recognize the variable display and it is difficult to grasp the digestion status of the reserved memory. In this embodiment, the bullet holes are displayed at different positions of the target 1500 displayed on the screen every time the variable display is executed (every time the reserved memory is consumed), so the player is paying attention to the target 1500. For example, the execution of variable display can be grasped by the increase in bullet holes. In addition, the player will have a big hit expectation as the bullet hole gradually approaches the center, the first shot, the second shot, and the third shot. It will be sufficient to pay attention to whether or not the center of the target 1500 is punched out. In this way, the player can be prevented from being confused by visually presenting the condition that is a big hit.

  In this way, during the period in which the ultrashort fluctuations continue, the variable display of the variable display is performed by performing the effect of paying attention to the bullet holes displayed at different positions on the target 1500, rather than paying attention to the multiple rows of effect symbols. It makes it easy to grasp the execution visually. Further, regarding the suggestion as to whether or not a big hit will occur, the effect is that the bullet hole approaches the center position of the target 1500 (that is, gradually approaches the big hit condition) while digesting the reserved memory before being subject to the pre-reading notice. By doing so, the player's expectation is raised and the interest is improved.

  Next, the execution timing of the prefetch notice effect will be described. 70 and 71 are explanatory diagrams showing the execution timing of the prefetch notice effect. Among these, FIG. 70 shows the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”. FIG. 71 shows the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “reserved ball change”. Note that the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” or “countdown” is the same as the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” shown in FIG. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, a case where a new start winning is generated during the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shown.

  First, with reference to FIG. 70, the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start prize to the first start prize opening 13a or the second start prize opening 13b (see step S311), it executes a winning effect process (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 70, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the change display A of the effect symbol, and the prize determination is performed. Then, a winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variable category command) is transmitted based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and the pending storage information is stored in the same interrupt. As a start winning designation command (first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command) and a total pending storage number designation command (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 70, it is assumed that the total number of pending storage before reception of the winning determination result designation command and the pending storage information is 3, and the production control microcomputer 100 displays the production symbol variation display A. It is assumed that the total number of pending storage has reached 4 due to the starting prize. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a prefetching notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800A), and a prefetching notice effect determination process (see step S6011). It is assumed that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the production mode. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the current total pending storage number (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 70) in the variation counter (see step S6014). Thereafter, when the variation time of the variation display A is completed, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 to 3 (see step S8312).

  Next, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display B is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect. Shall. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display B ends, and the chance symbol a is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 70 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 2 (see step S8312). That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, when the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is executed, a new start prize is generated during the variation display A, and the pre-reading is performed. When it is decided to execute the notice effect, the prefetch notice effect is started from the next variation display B.

  Further, when starting the next variation display C, the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 2, as shown in FIG. The pre-reading notice effect is continuously executed by performing a predetermined effect b (see step S8108), such as displaying a mode in which a flash shines above the 9 display screen. Then, the variation time of the variation display C ends, and the chance symbol b is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 70 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 1 (see step S8312).

  Further, when starting the next variation display D, the effect control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 1, as shown in FIG. The pre-reading notice effect is continuously executed by performing a predetermined effect c (see step S8108), such as displaying a mode in which a flash shines above the 9 display screen. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display D ends, and the chance symbol c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 70 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 0 (see step S8312). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the set pre-reading notice execution flag (see steps S8313 and S8316) based on the fact that the value of the fluctuation counter is 0 (see steps S8313 and S8316). finish.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the pre-reading notice effect is shown during the variation display up to the variation display D one before the variation display E subject to the determination at the time of winning. However, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed even during the variation display E that is the target of the determination at the time of winning. In this embodiment, since the pre-reading notice effect is not executed in the variation display E subject to the determination at the time of winning, the pre-reading notice effect and the super reach effect are included in one variation display E. Both are executed to prevent the production from becoming too unnatural (especially, the production is surely prevented from becoming too busy just before the end of the variable display). In the case where the pre-reading notice effect is executed even during the variation display E subject to the determination at the time of winning, the pre-reading notice effect is executed before the super reach effect during the variation display E is executed. It is only necessary to execute the super reach effect after the notice effect is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “reserved ball change” will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start prize to the first start prize opening 13a or the second start prize opening 13b (see step S311), it executes a winning effect process (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 71, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the change display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, a winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variable category command) is transmitted based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and the pending storage information is stored in the same interrupt. As a start winning designation command (first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command) and a total pending storage number designation command (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 71, it is assumed that the total number of pending storage before reception of the winning determination result designation command and the pending storage information is 3, and the production control microcomputer 100 displays the production symbol variation display A. It is assumed that the total number of pending storage has reached 4 due to the starting prize. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a prefetching notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800A), and a prefetching notice effect determination process (see step S6011). It is assumed that “reserved ball change” is determined as the effect mode. Then, by determining “change in reserved ball” as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 71, receives the first start winning designation command and the total reserved memory number designation command received. Based on the above, the first special display (red star display) or the second special display (blue star display) is incremented by 1 in the summation pending storage display unit 18c (see steps S6017 and S6018), and a start prize is generated. The pre-reading notice effect is immediately started at the timing of receiving the command at the start winning prize.

  Next, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display B is started. Then, the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each hold display including the remaining first special display or second special display is shifted one by one, as shown in FIG. , The pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “change in reserved ball” continues.

  Thereafter, each time the change display C and the change display D are started, the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each hold including the remaining first special display or second special display is performed. The display is shifted one by one, and as shown in FIG. 71, the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode “change in reserved ball” continues. Then, when the change display D for the advance notice is started, the hold display corresponding to the advance display for the advance notice is digested, so that the hold display (the first special display or the second special display) for the advance notice is added. As shown in FIG. 71, the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “holding ball change” is terminated.

  Next, the prefetch notice setting limit period will be described. 72 and 73 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prefetch notice setting limit period. Among these, FIG. 72 shows a prefetch notice setting restriction period when the start winning designation command as the storage information is missed. FIG. 73 shows a prefetch notice setting restriction period when a variation category command as determination result information is missed. It should be noted that the prefetch notice setting limit period when the total pending storage number designation command or the symbol designation command is missed or when the received command is inconsistent is the same as in FIGS. 72 and 73.

  First, the case where the start winning designation command is missed will be described with reference to FIG. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start prize to the first start prize opening 13a or the second start prize opening 13b (see step S311), it executes a winning effect process (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 72, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the change display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, control is performed to transmit a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and within the same interrupt, Control is performed to transmit a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) and a combined pending memory number designation command as the hold storage information (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 72, for some reason (for example, due to abnormality in transmission processing on the game control microcomputer 560 side or data corruption), the production control microcomputer 100 is started. It is assumed that the winning designation command has not been received normally. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the command at the time of start winning has not been received normally (see steps S6004 to S6006), sets the prefetching advance setting restriction flag (see step S6033), and makes the prefetching advance notice. Control during the setting limit period.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there is still a storage area in the storage state where the command could not be received correctly in the start winning prize command storage area every time the change display B to D is started. 72 (see steps S8002 to S8004), as shown in FIG. 72, the storage area in the storage state in which the command could not be received correctly at the timing of starting the variable display E for the reserved storage that caused the prefetch notice setting restriction If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction flag is reset (see step S8005), the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period ends.

  Next, a case where a variation category command is missed will be described with reference to FIG. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start prize to the first start prize opening 13a or the second start prize opening 13b (see step S311), it executes a winning effect process (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 73, it is assumed that there is a new start prize during the change display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, control is performed to transmit a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and within the same interrupt, Control is performed to transmit a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) and a combined pending memory number designation command as the hold storage information (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 73, the production control microcomputer 100 is fluctuated due to some cause (for example, due to abnormality in transmission processing on the game control microcomputer 560 side or data corruption). It is assumed that the category command has not been received normally. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the command at the time of start winning has not been received normally (see steps S6004 to S6006), sets the prefetching advance setting restriction flag (see step S6033), and makes the prefetching advance notice. Control during the setting limit period.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there is still a storage area in the storage state where the command could not be received correctly in the start winning prize command storage area every time the change display B to D is started. (See steps S8002 to S8004) As shown in FIG. 73, the storage area in the storage state in which the command could not be received correctly at the timing of starting the change display E for the reserved storage that caused the prefetch notice setting restriction If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction flag is reset (see step S8005), the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period ends.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big win is generated, the big hit type and the variation pattern type when the start winning occurs, and the first hold Hold memory information (in this example, start winning designation command and combined pending memory number designation command) is transmitted so that it is possible to recognize that the memory or the second pending memory has increased, whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not the big hit type, fluctuation Determination result information indicating a pattern type determination result (in this example, a symbol designation command and a variation category command) is transmitted. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of a predetermined state (in this example, super reach) based on the determination result information, and is included in the hold storage information. Execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted when the start winning designation command to be received cannot be normally received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered.

  That is, determination result information (in this example, a symbol designation command and a variable category command) and hold storage information (in this example, a start prize designation command and a total pending storage) received collectively in one timer interruption at the time of a start winning prize If some commands are missed, even if other commands received in a batch are received, the reliability of the received commands may be lacking. If the prefetching notice effect is executed based on the received command as it is, there is a discrepancy between the contents of the prefetching notice effect and the actual display of the variable display of the notice object that is actually executed. Reliability may be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the reliability of the prefetching notice effect is reduced by restricting the execution of the prefetching notice effect when the start winning designation command included in the hold storage information cannot be normally received. To prevent it.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the start winning designation command included in the hold memory information transmitted based on the one hold memory cannot be normally received, the fluctuation based on the one hold memory The execution of the pre-reading notice effect is limited until the display is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prefetching notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the prefetching notice effect from being lowered.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the determination result information (in this example, the symbol designating command and the variable category command) transmitted based on one hold storage cannot be normally received, The execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display based on the hold storage of the first time is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prefetching notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the prefetching notice effect from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, there is a case where execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted from when a command is missed or inconsistent until the reserved memory where the command is missed or inconsistent is exhausted. Although shown, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is limited only to the reserved memory where the command is missed or inconsistent, and the command at the start winning prize is normally set for the reserved memory generated after that If received, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may not be restricted even before the reserved memory in which the command is missed or inconsistent has been consumed. In the case of such a configuration, for example, the process of confirming the prefetching notice setting restriction flag in step S6003 of the prefetching notice effect determining process, the process of setting the undetermined information in step S6031, and the steps S8000 to S8014 of the effect symbol variation starting process. This processing is unnecessary.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the determination of the prefetching notice effect is not performed when a command is missed or inconsistency occurs, but the determination of the prefetching notice effect itself is performed. The execution may be restricted. For example, in the pre-reading notice effect determination process, when a command miss or mismatch is detected in the determination process of steps S6004 to S6006, the process of step S6033 is executed to set the prefetching notice setting restriction flag, while steps S6004 to S6006. Regardless of the determination result or the presence / absence of the prefetching notice setting restriction flag, the process of determining the prefetching notice effect in steps S6008 to S6014 may be executed without fail. If the prefetching notice setting restriction flag is set, the prefetching notice effect is restricted so that the prefetching notice effect is not executed by performing steps S6016 to S6018 of the prefetching notice effect determining process and step S8108 of the effect symbol changing process. May be. Further, as described above, the process of determining the pre-reading notice effect in steps S6008 to S6014 is always executed, and for example, steps S6016 to S6018 of the pre-reading notice effect determination process and step S8108 of the effect symbol changing process are performed. At each execution time of the process (execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect), it is checked every time whether there are any missing or inconsistent commands stored in the command storage area at the time of the start winning prize In this way, if there are any missing or inconsistent items, it may be possible not to execute the pre-reading notice effect.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes, as the determination result information, whether or not it is a big hit, a symbol designation command that can specify the determination result of the big hit type, a predetermined state (this In the example, a variable category command that can specify whether or not to be super reach) is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 100 also restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect even when the determination result specified by the received symbol designation command is inconsistent with the determination result specified by the received variation category command. For this reason, it is possible to further prevent the prefetching notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the prefetching notice effect from being lowered.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, the first notice effect that starts at the timing when the start winning occurs (in this example, the pre-reading notice effect of “reserved ball change”) or the start prize occurs. The second notice effect (in this example, “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”) starting at a timing other than the timing (in this example, the timing at which the next variation display is started after the start winning is generated), “Mode change” and “Countdown” look-ahead notice effect) can be executed. The production control microcomputer 100 is stored when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted after the change display based on one hold storage is started and the restriction on the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is released. The second notice effect can be executed based on the hold memory. For this reason, it is possible to cancel the restricted state of the pre-reading notice effect early without making the content of the pre-reading notice effect feel uncomfortable. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a continuous effect (in this example, a “countdown” pre-reading notice effect) that is executed in a continuous manner over a plurality of variable displays as the pre-reading notice effect. Can be executed, and after the display of fluctuation based on one hold memory is started and the restriction on the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is released, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted, and then based on the hold memory stored. The execution of continuous production is limited as a pre-reading notice production to be executed. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to prevent the variable display targeted by the pre-reading notice effect executed after the restriction on the execution of the pre-reading notice effect has been removed from becoming difficult to understand.

  Also, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variable display based on one hold memory, and after the restriction on the execution of the prefetching notice effect is released, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted. It may be configured not to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold storage stored when the user is present (for example, in the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. The process may be performed and the processes of steps S8006 to S8014 may not be executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in processing load and program capacity for determining whether to perform the pre-reading notice effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command as the pending storage information. The effect control microcomputer 100 restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect even if the specified result of the received start winning designation command is inconsistent with the specified result of the received total pending storage number designation command. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that super reach is determined, the first mode (in this example, “countdown”) or the second mode (in this example, “when symbol changes”). Change of change mode ”,“ mode transition ”) can be executed, and when it is determined that the super-reach is not determined, the pre-read notification effect of the second mode can be executed. . Further, the production control microcomputer 100 can execute the prefetching notice effect of the second mode even when execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted. For this reason, the pre-reading notice effect of the second mode that can be executed both in the case of becoming a super reach and in the case of not being super-reachable can be executed even when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted. In addition to ensuring the reliability of the production, the appearance frequency of the pre-reading notice production can be secured to some extent, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation in the order in which the first winning prize opening 13a or the second starting prize opening is awarded. Execute the display. Then, even if the production control microcomputer 100 cannot successfully receive the start winning designation command, it adds the total pending storage number designation command and the determination result information (design designation command, variation category command). If received, the notice effect of the second mode can be executed. Therefore, even if the start winning designation command cannot be normally received, if the total pending storage number designation command and the determination result information (symbol designation command, variable category command) are received, the super reach Since the second aspect of the notice effect that can be executed in both the cases where it becomes and the case where it is not possible is executed, the appearance frequency of the prefetch notice effect is prevented to some extent while preventing the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered. It can be secured and the interest in games can be improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 restricts execution of the pre-reading notice production even when the pending storage information and the determination result information cannot be received in the regular order. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a hold display on the combined hold storage display unit 18c based on the hold storage information. And even if it is a case where hold storage information or judgment result information cannot be received normally, when recognizing that the 1st hold memory or the 2nd hold memory increased, it will be in the increased hold memory. The display mode of the corresponding hold display is displayed in a special display mode (in this example, the hold-down display in the missed mode) different from the normal display mode (in this example, the first normal display and the second normal display). For this reason, even if the hold memory information or the determination result information cannot be received normally, the number of the hold memories can be recognized by the player, and the player is prevented from feeling distrust. can do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the variable display of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol was performed in order of the start winning prize of the 1st start winning opening 13a and the 2nd starting winning opening 13b was shown, for example, Regardless of the winning order, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation display of the second special symbol as compared with the variation display of the first special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed in this way, instead of the start winning designation command and the combined pending memory number designation command as the pending memory information, the first reserved memory number or the second You may comprise so that the pending | holding memory number addition designation | designated command (1st pending | holding memory number addition designation | designated command or 2nd pending | holding memory number addition designation | designated command) which shows that the pending | holding memory number increased may be transmitted. That is, when a start winning is generated, a set of three commands, that is, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count addition designation command, may be transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt. Even in such a case, if the production control microcomputer 100 limits the execution of the pre-reading notice production based on having missed the reserved storage number addition designation command as the reserved storage information, Good. In this case, as the reserved memory information, the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition that can recognize which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory has increased as described above. A designated command may be transmitted, and a first reserved memory number designation command in which the first reserved memory number is set as EXT data, or a second reserved memory number designation command in which the second reserved memory number is set as EXT data. You may make it transmit.

  In this embodiment, the management method of the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period is shown by using the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag. However, the management method of the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period is shown in this embodiment. It can't be limited to things.

(1) For example, the timing for determining whether or not the prefetching notice setting restriction period is in effect without performing management using a flag such as the prefetching notice setting restriction flag (for example, step S6002 of the prefetching notice effect determination process) Or the command stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area every time the timing symbol variation start processing (step S8000 timing) is confirmed, and the command is missed or inconsistent. You may make it determine every time whether the thing of a state remains. If there is still a command that has been missed or inconsistent, it is determined that the pre-reading notice setting limit period is in effect, and the command is missing or inconsistent. If there is no thing, it may be determined that the prefetch notice setting limit period is not in effect.

(2) Further, for example, even when management using a flag such as the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is performed, the number of variable displays until the reserved memory that causes the prefetching notice setting restriction is exhausted. The counter is used for management, and it is determined that the reserved memory that caused the restriction on the prefetching notice setting has been exhausted, and the prefetching notice setting restriction flag is reset to end the prefetching notice setting restriction period. May be. In this case, for example, when the prefetching notice setting limit flag is set and the prefetching notice setting restriction period is started in step S6033 of the prefetching notice effect determination process, the current total number of pending storage is set in the counter, and each change display is performed. The counter value is decremented by one. When the value of the counter reaches 0, it is determined that the reserved memory that caused the prefetching notice setting restriction has been consumed, and the prefetching notice setting restriction flag is reset to end the prefetching notice setting restriction period. Good. In this case, if a command is missed or inconsistent before the prefetching notice setting restriction period starts after setting the prefetching notice setting restriction flag and before the prefetching notice setting restriction period, It is sufficient to reset the total pending storage number in the counter and extend the pre-reading notice setting limit period until the reserved memory corresponding to the missed command or the inconsistency generated later is exhausted.

  In the above embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 8). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the example of completely prohibiting the prefetching notice has been described as a mode for restricting the execution of the prefetching notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 74 (a ′), the restriction may not be completely prohibiting the prefetching notice, but may restrict (for example, execute with a reduced probability) a part or all of the prefetching notice. In this example, the allocation table of the shape of the holding memory in the pre-reading notice of the change in the holding ball includes a pre-reading notice executable table and a pre-reading notice restriction table, and the pre-reading notice executable table is the same as that in FIG. However, the prefetch notice restriction table is different from the prefetch notice prohibition table in FIG. 74A, so that a large star shape and a small heart shape are selected (that is, restricted) with a lower probability than the prefetch notice restriction table. It has become. Note that if a heart shape with a large jackpot confirmation is selected, uncertain information is notified in advance, so that the large heart shape is not selected (that is, prohibited).

  In the above-described embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 1, an example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes the probability variation attacker 20B that functions as the first specific area and the normal attacker 20A that functions as the second specific area has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special variable winning ball apparatus (not shown but referred to as “special variable winning ball apparatus 20 ′” for convenience of explanation) is a single functioning function as the first specific area and the second specific area. In this case, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 ′ has a high probability by allowing the game medium to pass through during the first period (for example, the first 5 seconds of the 15th round). Control to a state (that is, function as the first specific area), and a second period different from the first period (for example, the remaining 24 seconds of the 15th round) is controlled to a high probability state even if the game medium passes. No (i.e. functions as a second specific area) as may be configured. Specifically, the 1st to 14th rounds function as the normal attacker, and the 15th round initially functions as a probabilistic attacker for 5 seconds. When the game ball is detected by the above, it is controlled to the probability change state (in other words, if the game ball does not win, it is not controlled to the probability change state), and the remaining 24 seconds are controlled to function as a normal attacker again. According to this, the function equivalent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 can be realized by changing the control of the model of the single attacker often seen in the cage.

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot ends, and as shown in FIG. 43, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the prefetch notice prohibition flag based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command (YES in step S641). (Step S643) Although an example has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, but although not shown, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the designation command after the opening of the 15th round big prize opening in step S681 in FIG. The prefetch notice prohibition flag may be reset. In the above embodiment, an example in which the probability variation attacker 20B is released in the fifteenth round has been described. In this case, when a designation command after opening the big prize opening based on the last closing of the probability variation attacker 20B is received, the prefetch notice prohibition flag may be reset. That is, the restriction of the notice effect (pre-read notice) may be canceled based on the fact that the probability change attacker 20B is changed from the open state to the closed state in the final opening / closing operation. According to this, since the indefinite information is not notified to the player and the execution frequency of the notice effect is not lowered more than necessary, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot ends, and as shown in FIG. 43, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the prefetch notice prohibition flag based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command (YES in step S641). The example of performing (step S643) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not shown, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs a probability change detection command when the probability change detection switch 24a detects a game ball won in the probability change attacker 20B. The presentation control microcomputer 100 may reset the prefetch notice prohibition flag when receiving the probability change detection command in the command analysis process. That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the probability change attacker 20B changed to the open state, a notice effect (cancel the restriction of the pre-read notice) may be used. According to this, since the indefinite information is not notified to the player and the execution frequency of the notice effect is not lowered more than necessary, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13A, an example in which the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change does not include the normal jackpot determination value has been described. As shown, the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change may include a normal jackpot determination value. As shown in FIG. 82 instead of FIG. 27, the winning effect processing in this case confirms whether or not the random R is the normal jackpot determination value (step S220). If YES, the step S229 is performed. If NO, it is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag is set (step S221). If NO, the process proceeds to S224. If YES, whether the random R is a jackpot determination value at the time of probability change. Whether or not is confirmed (step S222), if YES, the process proceeds to step S229, and if NO, the process proceeds to S224. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 is not shown in FIG. 50 after the determination of YES in step S6011C, the determination of YES in step S6011D, and the determination of YES in step S6011E after the determination in step S6011C. However, it is determined whether or not the high probability state flag is being set, and if it is not being set (that is, the normal state), the process of step S6011F may be executed. That is, even in the normal state, even when the big hit hold memory is stored, the execution of the notice effect (prefetch notice) can be prevented from being restricted. When the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change includes the jackpot determination value at the normal time, the random R that is a jackpot in the normal state is a jackpot even if the gaming state becomes the probability change state. This is because even when the notice effect is executed, there is no possibility of notifying the player of indefinite information and the frequency of executing the notice effect increases, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which, when the prefetch notice prohibition flag is reset in step S643 of FIG. 43, the restriction of the prefetch notice regarding the reserved storage based on the start winning after the reset is released. Not limited to this, it is also possible to cancel the restriction of the pre-reading notice for the reserved memory based on the start winning prior to the reset and execute the pre-reading notice for the already stored reserved memory.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the specific game state (big hit game state) is a special specific game state in which the probability variation attacker 20B is always released has been described. May be included.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the example of performing the pre-reading advance notice for blinking the hold memory when a big hit occurs has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold memory is blinked even in the case of a loss. You may make it do.

  In the above-described embodiment, it may be configured to generate a big hit with a probability variation state (that is, the probability variation state is always obtained after the big hit is completed). In this case, when there is a storage P for the probability variation big hit In addition, if the reserved memory Q based on the start winning that has occurred after the storage matches the jackpot determination value at the time of the probability change, a prefetch notice may be executed for the reserved memory Q.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the number and size of characters displayed in the background image and the background color are changed according to the value of the high probability state background continuation counter value. You may make it vary the aspect of the production | presentation symbol in a probability state. For example, when the high probability state background continuation counter value is 1000 or more, the effect design may be a special character design or the color may be changed.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the change period of the background image becomes longer as the value of the high probability state background continuation counter value increases has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and as the high probability state background continuation counter value increases. The change period of the background image may be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), with respect to fluctuations with big hits or probability change falls (for example, fluctuations with super reach C), The example in which the right-handed display is not performed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a right-handed display may be blinked, or the display may be made lighter.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the common effect that is executed in the case of a probable fall and the case of a big hit is Super Reach C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common effect that does not become a reach aspect is executed. Anyway.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which two jackpot signals are output during the jackpot gaming state (becomes ON state) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot two signals are not output during the jackpot gaming state (OFF state). It is also possible to do so. In this case, in the external device, the occurrence of consecutive chunks is specified based on the fact that the jackpot 1 signal is turned on at the timing when the two jackpot signals are switched from the ON state to the OFF state, and the number of consecutive chunks is counted. It is possible.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which it is possible to determine that a loss has occurred with a high probability at the time of starting winning a prize and a variable fall has occurred with a variable category command (C610). It may not be included in the information on whether or not it has been done. For example, when it is determined that random 0 = determined value with probability variation falling in the winning probability variation falling determination process (Y in step S202), a winning determination certain variation falling designation command (for example, command C500 (H)) is produced. You may make it transmit to the microcomputer 100 for control. Here, the winning determination probability change fall designation command (command C500 (H)) is executed when the processing of steps S1218 to S1221 and steps S1229 to S1232 is executed, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the first start prize designation. The command or the second start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted together as a set command within one timer interrupt. The production control microcomputer 100 which has received the winning determination accuracy change fall designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the first start prize designation command or the second start prize designation command transmitted within one timer interrupt, and By storing the winning determination probability variation falling designation command in correspondence with the total pending storage number designation command, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of the probability variation fall for each pending storage.

  When the winning determination probability change change command (for example, command C500 (H)) is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 by the method as described above, It is confirmed whether the designated command indicates a jackpot symbol or a missing symbol, and whether or not a winning determination certain change falling designation command (referred to as command C500 (H)) corresponding to the symbol designation command is stored. It is possible to confirm. For example, after it is determined in step S8016A shown in FIG. 56 that the display result designation command is a jackpot designation command (YES), the winning determination judgment change variable drop designation command (command C500 (H)) is associated with the display result designation command. Whether or not) is stored can be determined. Here, when it is determined that the winning determination probability variation drop designation command (command C500 (H)) is stored (YES) in association with the display result designation command, in step S8018, the effect symbol is changing. Alternatively, the process table may be selected so that the special character 1300 shown in FIG. 77D and a two-dimensional barcode for accessing a predetermined site are displayed on the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol is stopped. In other words, when a rare situation occurs in which the change falls with probability and a big hit occurs, the special character 1300 shown in FIG. 77 (d) is displayed. By adding value to situations that occur rarely in this way, the interest of the game can be improved. Note that, as a variation category command indicating a big hit in a high probability / high base state, a command when there is a probability change fall and a command when there is no probability change fall may be prepared separately. According to this, even if there is no winning determination probability variation falling command as described above, whether or not the start winning hold memory is a big hit and a certain variation falling is indicated by the production control microcomputer 100 that has received the variation category command. It is possible to confirm whether or not.

[Modification]
In the above embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is downstream of the gate 32, and the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 can win the second start winning port 13b when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. An example was described. Here, the opening control of the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable display device 15 is located upstream rather than downstream of the gate 32 will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), a variable winning ball apparatus 15 'is provided upstream of the gate 32'. The variable winning ball device 15 ′ is switched between a closed state and an open state by tilt control of the movable blade piece by the solenoid 16c. In such a configuration, the game ball left-handed toward the left game area 7A is likely to win the second start winning opening 13c when the variable winning ball device 15 'is controlled to be in the open state. A game ball won in the second start winning opening 13c is detected by the second start opening switch 15c. The game balls that have not won the variable winning ball device 15 ′ are guided by a game nail (not shown), a frame of the effect display device 9, and the like, and a gate 32 ′ provided at the lower left of the variable winning ball device 15 ′. Pass at a high rate. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 'is detected by the gate switch 32c.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 81, as the first game ball passes through the gate 32 ′, variable display of the normal symbol is started, the display result is hit, and the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. The period until (1) to (4) is t1. Then, variable display of the normal symbol is started, the display result is a win, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, and the period from the open state to the end (period from (1) to (5) ) Is t2. Then, after the first game ball passes through the gate 32 ′, the second game ball launched immediately after the first game ball is fired (after 0.6 seconds in this example) is transferred to the variable winning ball device 15. The period until it reaches is T2. Here, t1 is set to be shorter than T2, and t2 is set to be longer than T2.

  That is, by controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 so that t1 <T2 <t2, the first game ball passes through the gate 32 ′ as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b). Based on the above, the variable display of the normal symbol is started, and when the display result is a hit and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, the second game ball wins the second start winning opening 13c. Timing control is performed. By executing such timing control, when the second game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15, it is not yet in an open state (ie, T2 <t1), or the open state has already been completed. (That is, T2> t2) is prevented, and the winning rate to the variable winning ball apparatus 15 ′ is increased.

  In this modification, the time until the first game ball reaches the gate 32 ′ from the variable winning ball device 15 ′ without winning the variable winning ball device 15 ′ and the time t1 is the game time. It may be set to be equal to or shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the firing interval of the medium. In this way, when the variable winning ball device 15 ′ is in the closed state, the normal symbol variable display is started based on the fact that the first game ball has passed through the gate 32 ′, and the display result is The second game ball can win the second start winning opening 13c when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened in the winning state. For example, when the time until the first game ball reaches the gate 32 ′ from the variable winning ball device 15 ′ without winning the variable winning ball device 15 ′ is 0.2 seconds, t1 is set to 0.00. It may be set to be about 4 seconds or less.

  In this modified example and the above-described embodiment, t2 is a period from the start of variable display of normal symbols to the end of the open state after the variable winning ball devices 15, 15 ′ are controlled to the open state. If the number of times the variable winning balls 15, 15 ′ are released when the display result of the normal symbol is a win in the high base state, the variable winning ball device is started after the variable symbol is displayed. The period until the first opening of 15, 15 ′ is started is defined as t1, and the period from the start of variable symbol display until the final opening of the variable winning balls 15, 15 ′ is completed is defined as t2. Good. By defining in this way, the probability that the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 can win the variable winning ball device 15 increases, and the probability that the second game ball wins the variable winning ball device 15 'increases.

  In the above embodiment, both the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are configured by the first display unit (LEDs 403, 405) and the second display unit (7-segment LEDs 404, 406). In the high base state, right-handed is executed and a start winning is made at the second start winning opening 13b. Therefore, only the second special symbol display 8b and the first display unit (LED 405) You may make it comprise 2 display parts (7 segment LED406). Similarly, for the 4th symbol display area, only the 4th symbol display area corresponding to the variation of the 2nd special symbol may be composed of the first display portion (9c) and the second display portion (9d). good.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the LEDs 403 and 405 blink during the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b has been described. A 7-segment LED different from the LEDs 404 and 406 may be provided, and each segment of the 7-segment LED may be lit in a relay manner during variable display. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are configured by 7 segment LEDs with a decimal point, and the decimal point portion (DP) is blinked during variable display, and the display result is derived and displayed. During the period, a predetermined segment of the 7-segment portion (for example, a segment constituting 9 if it is a big hit, and-if it is a deviation) may be turned on according to the display result. By doing so, it is not necessary to combine a plurality of parts in the variable display unit and the stop symbol display unit, and the configuration and control are simplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the LED 401 blinks during normal variable display of the normal symbol display 10 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each segment of the segment LED may be lit in a relay manner. Further, the display result may not be indicated by turning on (when hitting) or turning off (when missing), but the red LED may be turned on when hitting, and the blue LED may be turned on when falling off.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the pre-shooting notice effect in the “shooting” mode, an example has been described in which a bullet hole approaches the center position of the target 1500 for each change, and finally a big hit is displayed when the bullet hole is displayed at the center of the target 1500. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by displaying a big hit line parallel to the horizontal direction, bullet holes are displayed so as to approach the big hit line for each change, and finally the bullet holes are displayed at positions beyond the big hit line. If it is done, it is possible to execute an effect that makes a big hit, and if it does not exceed the big hit line, it will be out of place. Further, for example, a picture may be drawn with bullet holes, and an effect may be executed such that when the picture is finally completed (for example, becomes a star mark), it becomes a big hit, and if it is not completed, the picture is lost.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 15 Variable winning ball device 20 Special variable winning ball device 20A Normal attacker 20B Probability change Attacker 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
64 Information Output Circuit 560 Game Control Microcomputer 80 Production Control Board 100 Production Control Microcomputer 101 Production Control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (2)

A player plays a game by launching a game medium into the game area,
A variable winning device provided in the gaming area and capable of changing between an unfavorable state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to win and an advantageous state in which the game medium is easy to win;
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the normal start area provided in the game area, a plurality of types of normal identification information that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed, and the display result of the variable display is variable as the normal identification information. Normal identification information variable display control means for performing control to derive and display on the display device;
Variable winning device control means for performing control to change the variable winning device to an advantageous state based on the display result derived and displayed on the normal identification information variable display device being a predetermined display result;
High base state control for controlling from a low base state in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state to a high base state in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state based on a predetermined condition being satisfied Means, and
The variable winning device is downstream of the normal starting area in the gaming area, and a high percentage of game media that have passed through the normal starting area are controlled when the variable winning apparatus is controlled in an advantageous state. A gaming machine provided at a winning position,
During the time t1 from the start of the variable display of the normal identification information in the high base state to the time when the variable winning device is controlled to the advantageous state, the game medium that has passed the normal starting area is displayed on the variable winning device. It is set to be shorter than the time Tx to reach,
The time t2 from the start of the variable display of the normal identification information in the high base state to the end of the control of the advantageous state after the variable winning device is controlled to the advantageous state is set to be longer than the time Tx. A gaming machine characterized by being set to. A player plays a game by launching a game medium into the game area,
A variable winning device provided in the gaming area and capable of changing between an unfavorable state in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to win and an advantageous state in which the game medium is easy to win;
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the normal start area provided in the game area, a plurality of types of normal identification information that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed, and the display result of the variable display is variable as the normal identification information. Normal identification information variable display control means for performing control to derive and display on the display device;
Variable winning device control means for performing control to change the variable winning device to an advantageous state based on the display result derived and displayed on the normal identification information variable display device being a predetermined display result;
High base state control for controlling from a low base state in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state to a high base state in which the variable winning device is in an advantageous state based on a predetermined condition being satisfied Means, and
The variable prize apparatus is upstream of the normal start area in the game area, and a high percentage of game media launched at a predetermined strength is controlled when the variable prize apparatus is controlled to be in an advantageous state. It is provided at the position to win,
The normal start area is a gaming machine provided at a position where game media that has not won the variable winning device pass at a predetermined frequency,
The time t1 from the start of the variable display of the normal identification information in the high base state to the time when the variable winning device is controlled to the advantageous state is after the first game medium passes through the normal start area. The second game medium launched next to the first game medium is set to be shorter than the time Ty until it reaches the variable winning device,
The time t2 from the start of the variable display of the normal identification information in the high base state to the end of the control of the advantageous state after the variable winning device is controlled to the advantageous state is set to be longer than the time Ty. A gaming machine characterized by being set to.